Home

Canon 9350B001 Digital Camera User Manual

Contents

1. 113 Protecing Mages sasra epoca raices 114 Choosing a Selection Methoo oooccccccccccononcccnoncncnonnnnanonns 114 Choosing Images Individually ccccocoonoccncnnncncnnonananonns 114 Selecting a Range sica ina lata 115 Protecting All Images at ONCE coccccccccoooooccoconcncnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnonos 115 Clearing All Protection at ONCE ccccooononcconcccconcnnnaacononnnnos 115 nn tieeeeecewian 116 Erasing Multiple Images at OnCe coooooocccccccnocccnnncccnonononononas 116 Choosing a Selection Method occccoononcccccnnccnncncnononinnnnns 116 Choosing Images Individually oooonccccconncccnnccnonnnnnnnnns 116 Selecting a Range mts 117 Specifying All Images at OnCe cccccccconnccnnnccccnncocanaconnnnnnos 117 Rotating IMAGES manAR 117 Deactivating Auto Rotation seminarista rra 118 Tagging Images as Favorites ccccconnnicccconnccccnonicncnnnnnnnnns 118 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Index Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 Convenient Control Touch Actions occcccccoccnccconnnnccnonnnnos 119 Using Touch Actions FUNCION Sidi 119 Changing Touch Actions Functions sccc norinicia ia 119 Assignable Functions sicarios 120 Editing Still IMages oooccccoccnnnnoccc
2. Time zone 111152 Image stabilization L191 Camera Basics MF indicator 1181 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 24 Shutter speed 1193 A94 MA o A 19 25 Electronic level 450 26 Aperture value 1194 L494 O al Se Q O eee TS e e a o e er cr Auto Mode 2 37 Exposure level L194 Hybrid Auto Mode 27 Exposure compensation level 074 38 Exposure compensation level KH 74 3 Other Shooting Modes 28 ISO speed 475 In AM mode indicates the number of shots available 4 P Mode Ae D 200 Gh Battery Level 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 28 29 23 24 25 26 27 37 B An on screen icon or message indicates the NEO a charge level E E Details Setter lan _ a charge T Wii Functions 6 Playback Mode 1 Shooting mode 181 Scene 10 2 Flash mode M88 12 Battery level R4179 ca Nearly as the battery bd 3 Flash exposure compensation Flash 13 Still image compression 191 pack soon Q Accessories output level 89 L195 Resolution L149 sal Depleted charge the battery pack 4 Metering method Ea 14 Recordable shots 1195 ene immediately Shad t 1178 adow correction L178 15 Movie quality Q050 10 Appendix 5 ND filter 178 16 Digital zoom magnification 6 Drive mode 1187 AEB 1140 Digital tele converter nee shooting M476 Focus ss bracketing L1
3. ccccsssssssseeeeeseseessesenneeeens 93 Specific Shutter Speeds Tv Mode cccooooccoccccoonoocconoo 93 Specific Aperture Values Av MOd8 cccocoooccncccoccncccconono 94 Specific Shutter Speeds and Aperture Values M Mode 94 Adjusting the Flash Output ninia 95 Recording Movies at Specific Shutter Speeds and Aperture Val ae ener ne ear tne na werner ee cee nn ee E E EEE 96 Setup via Touch Operations srccscsnatnancassenncsnennesseunissennesacidtannesnes 96 Customization for Shooting Styles ccc ooooccnncccoonnononnoos 97 Changing Control Ring Settings oooocccccconcconccnnonanonnnnns 97 Functions Assignable to the Control Ring ccccccccccccoocco 97 Assigning Functions to the Control Ring cccccccccccccnoccoos 98 Using the Control Ring for Adjustment ooccccncccnnnnnonncccnnnccnnnnos 98 Customizing Display Information ooooocccnnccccnnnnonnnccnnnncncnnnnnnnnns 99 Assigning Functions to Buttons scanner 99 Customizing the FUNC Menu FUNC Menu Layout 100 Choosing Items to Include in the Menu ccccoccnnccccnnnccnnnnnncnnnn 100 Rearranging Menu Items ccccoonccnocicnncnnnnnnonannnoncnononnos 101 Saving Shooting Settings cccconnonnnncnnnnnncccnonncnnnnnnnnnonananos 101 Settings that can be Saved occccconnccnccicnnoninocionannnonnonannnnnnns 101 Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items My Menu 102
4. 3 Set the display language o Press the a W 4 buttons or turn the 4 dial to choose a language and then press the button o Once the display language has been set the setting screen is no longer displayed English Norsk Romana Deutsch Svenska Turkce Francais Espanol dy sa Nederlands EAAnvixa ae lno Dansk Pycckmh fa RAW Portugu s Polski tety Suomi e tina t 20 G e The current time is displayed if you wait too long in step 2 after pressing the 6 button before you press the MENU button In this case press the KA button to dismiss the time display and repeat step 2 e You can also change the display language by pressing the MENU button and choosing Language G on the FT tab Nl d e You can also set the display language by touching a language on the screen in step 3 and then touching it again Trying the Camera Out gt gt Still Images gt Movies Follow these instructions to turn the camera on shoot still images or movies and then view them Shooting Smart Auto For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specific scenes simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions Turn the camera on o Press the power button o The startup screen is displayed 2 Enter AUTO mode O Set the mode dial to AUTO o Aim the camera at the subject The camera will make a slight clicking noise as it determines the scene o Icons representing t
5. Press halfway Press lightly to focus Oo Press the shutter button halfway The camera beeps twice and AF frames are displayed around image areas in focus 2 Press all the way down From the halfway position press fully to shoot o The camera shoots as a shutter sound is played o Keep the camera still until the shutter sound ends O Images may be out of focus if you shoot without initially pressing the shutter button halfway e Length of shutter sound playback varies depending on the time required for the shot It may take longer in some shooting scenes and images will be blurry if you move the camera or the subject moves before the shutter sound ends Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Index Camera Basics 92 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 27 Shooting Modes Use the mode dial to access each shooting mode 1 2 3 4 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 5 Fully automatic shooting with camera determined settings A22 0134 00136 Creative Shot Mode See several effects applied to each shot automatically L154 Special Scene Mode 6 Shoot with optimal settings for specific scenes L155 P Tv Av M and C Modes Take a variety of shots using your preferred settings 2173 193 Movie Mod
6. button o The Web service settings are now updated menu Ea e lf any configured settings change follow these steps again to update the camera settings Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode Wi Fi Functions Index 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 140 Uploading Images to Web Services 4 Access the Wi Fi menu O Press the button to turn the camera on O Press the a button 2 Choose the destination Upload to Web service 0 E e Choose the icon of the Web service for sharing either press the a w buttons D Gal ls or turn the 4 dial and then press the per 9 button menu Ea o If multiple recipients or sharing options are used with a Web service choose the desired item on the Select Recipient screen either press the a W buttons or turn the dial and then press the 9 button r 3 Send images o Turn the dB dial to choose an image to send press the 4 buttons to choose Send this image and then press the button O Press the a4 w 4 buttons to choose Send and then press the 9 button e When uploading to YouTube read the terms of service choose I Agree and press the button Image transfer will begin The screen darkens during image tra
7. The setting is changed to Continuous for movie recording 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 91 O e f image stabilization cannot prevent camera shake mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to hold it still In this case set IS Mode to Off Shooting Movies with Subjects at the Same Size Shown before Shooting B Movies Normally once movie recording begins the image display area changes and subjects are enlarged to allow for correction of significant camera shake To shoot subjects at the same size shown before shooting you can choose not to reduce significant camera shake IS Settings O Follow the steps in Changing the IS IS Mode a near Mode Settings 11191 to access the Dynamic IS 2 IS Settings screen Reduces camera shake for movie o Choose Dynamic IS and then choose shooting while walking 2 030 E gt e You can also set IS Mode to Off so that subjects are recorded at the same size shown before shooting Switching the Color of Shooting Screen Information gt gt Still Images gt Movies Information displayed on the shooting screen and menus can be changed to a color suitable for shooting under low light conditions Enabling this setting is useful in modes such as EM L166 aE o Pres
8. button 2 Shoot Focusing Range ES al Take close ups of sea life using the digital zoom for ES al even closer shots Avoid missing unexpected underwater shooting Quick opportunities when shooting subjects some distance away Especially effective for moving subjects ME Mania Focus on subjects manually H481 ocus 11196 for details on the range of each Refer to Shooting Range focus range 1 e In S mode optical zoom is set to maximum wide angle e In S mode use of digital zoom may cause images to appear grainy at some resolutions L149 e In O mode subjects at close range may not be in focus In this case try setting the focus range to LA ni UN e You can also configure this setting by pressing the Iq button touching the desired focusing range and then touching it again Correcting White Balance gt gt Still Images gt Movies White balance can be manually corrected in df mode H455 This adjustment can match the effect of using a commercially available color compensating filter Choose t o Follow steps 1 2 in Specific Scenes Q155 and choose d 2 Choose white balance o Press the 9 button and then choose MA in the menu 3 Adjust the setting e Turn the ring to adjust the correction level for B and A and then press the button Once the setting is complete WB is displayed 1 The camera will retain white balance cor
9. oooooccnnncno 47 Erasing Registered Information c ccssssccceeceeeeessssseeeees 48 Image Customization Features oooocccccccccnnononnnoncnnncnnnnnnononos 48 Changing the Aspect Ratio iio 48 Changing Image Resolution SiZ8 ccccoocooonccnnnnccnnnnnananonns 49 Guidelines for Choosing Resolution Based on Paper Size for 3 2 UMASS a a ica 49 Correcting Greenish Image Areas from Mercury Lamps 49 Changing Movie Image Quality occcccccccnccccconconnononnnonnnnnnnas 50 Helpful Shooting Features ccccoonocccncccoocnoccnnccnonanccononnnonanons 50 Using the Dual Axis Electronic Level oooooncnococonnononss 50 Magnifying the Area in FOCUS oooccccccccccconoccncnnnonncccnnannnnnnonononnnns 51 Checking for Closed Eyes iia iia 51 Customizing Camera Operation occccooonnncnncccconnnonnnonnnnnnnnnnoos 52 Deactivating the AF Assist BeaM occccconnncnccconccnncnccnnccncnnnnnannnns 52 Deactivating the Red Eye Reduction Lamp c ccseeeeeeee 52 Changing the Image Display Style after Shots 52 Changing the Image Display Period after Shots 52 Changing the Screen Displayed after Shots 53 Other Shooting Modes cccccccsssssssseseeeesesnesssseeees 54 Enjoying a Variety of Images from Each Shot Creative SHO cnseeencctcee oes renee ceets aco ceceteacceeteen acetone sean 54 Choosin
10. 45 People other than those registered may be mistakenly detected as the registered person if they share similar facial features Registered people may not be correctly detected if the captured image or scene differs drastically from the registered face information If a registered face is not detected or not easily detected overwrite registered information with new face info Registering face info right before shooting will allow for easier detection of registered faces If a person is mistakenly detected as another person and you continue shooting you can edit or erase the name recorded in the image during playback 4111 Because faces of babies and children change quickly as they grow you should update their face info regularly 0144 Names will still be recorded in images even if you clear the Shooting Info check box in Custom Display 99 on the I tab so that the names are not displayed If you don t want names to be recorded in still images choose Face ID Settings on the e tab choose Face ID and then choose Off You can check names recorded in images in the playback screen simple information display R4105 In NE mode names are not displayed on the shooting screen but they will be recorded in still images Names recorded in continuous shooting 443 1187 will continue to be recorded in the same position as for the first shot even if subjects move Face 1D Settings Face ID Add to Registr
11. Configure the setting O Follow the steps in Adjusting White Balance H478 to choose M o Turn the Z ring to adjust the correction level for B and A o Once the setting is complete WB is displayed arr i EE Reset 2 Configure advanced settings e To configure more advanced settings press the MENU button and adjust the correction level by turning the ring or 8 dial or pressing the a W 4 buttons o To reset the correction level press the RING button o Press the MENU button to complete the setting The camera will retain white balance correction levels even if you switch to another white balance option by following steps in Adjusting White Balance 12178 but correction levels will be reset if you record custom white balance data B blue A amber M magenta G green You can customize camera operation so that the B and A adjustment screen can be accessed simply by turning the ring 197 One level of blue amber correction is equivalent to about 7 mireds on a color temperature conversion filter Mired Color temperature unit representing color temperature conversion filter density You can also choose the correction level by touching or dragging the bar in step 1 or the frame in step 2 You can also access the screen in step 2 by touching MAN in step 1 On the screen in step 2 you can touch ER to restore the original level and touch MAM to re
12. cccccceeeseeeeceeeseeeeessasseeeeseaaeeeees 138 Sending Images to a Registered Web Service 138 Registering Web Services cion ca 138 Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY 139 Registering Other Web Services cccocoooocccnnccccnononananonns 140 Uploading Images to Web Services occccccccccccncccconnnnncnnonos 141 Printing Images Wirelessly from a Connected Printer 142 Sending Images to Another Camera c s cssseeeeeeeseeeeeees 143 Image Sending OPTIONS veces dccnzcccncsccccaqeddesssngacennseesecedeaatancncsy 144 Sending Multiple IMages ccccoonoccncnnncnoccccnnnncnnnnnnnnnonananenos 144 Notes on Sending IMages oooccccnccccccononcnononnnnnccnnacncnnnnnonononns 144 Choosing the Image Resolution SiZe ccccecesesseeeeeeeeees 145 Adding Comments carried denon 145 Sending Images Automatically Image SynC 145 Initial PRED ALAMOS nicas cali 145 Preparing the Camera sisas 145 Preparing the Computer iniciacion ici 146 Sending Images mesones cuarentena 146 Using a Smartphone to View Camera Images and Control he Camellos 147 Geotagging Images on the Camera oooccncccccccccncccnonnnnncnnnannnnos 147 Shooting Remotely accionar uo dirias cido riab 148 Editing or Erasing Wi Fi Settings oocccocccoooooccnnccnnnoo 149 Editing Connection Information ooooccncccnccccnnonccnnnncnnnnnnns 149 Changing a Device Nickname ccccccccc
13. o For menu items with options not shown first press the or P button to switch screens and then either press the a w buttons or turn the dB dial to select the menu item Index o To return to the previous screen press the MENU button lt gt 3 30 4 Choose an option o Press the 4 buttons to choose an option Hints amp Tips On Date Time 08 08 14 10 00 5 Finish the setup process o Press the MENU button to return to the screen displayed before you pressed the IMENU button in step 1 e To undo any accidental setting changes you can restore the camera s default settings 111157 Touch Screen Operations To access tabs press the MENU button to access the menu screen and then touch the desired tab Drag the menu items up or down to scroll them or touch a menu item to choose it Touch an option to choose it Options shown with 4 icons on either side can also be configured by touching these icons For menu items displayed with a bar to indicate the level touch the desired position on the bar To configure menu items for which options are not shown first touch the menu item to access the setting screen On the setting screen either drag or touch to choose the menu item and then touch to choose the option To return to the previous screen touch MEN You can also touch input elements such as check boxes or text fields to select them and you can enter t
14. q Make sure the camera and TV are off O e Itis not possible to connect the USB cable or an optional stereo 8 Setting Menu AV cable at the same time as an HDMI cable Forcing the cables SS 2 Connect the camera to the TV dde camera at the same time may damage the camera or cables a ps in n ne cable plug fully into Touch screen operations are not supported while the camera is e Input as shown connected to a television 10 Appendix Index G e Camera operating sounds are not played while the camera is connected to an HDTV lt gt 5 161 Playback on a Standard Definition TV gt gt Still Images gt Movies Connecting the camera to a TV with the Stereo AV Cable AVC DC400ST sold separately enables you to view your shots on the larger screen of the TV as you control the camera 4 Make sure the camera and TV are off 2 Connect the camera to the TV e On the TV insert the cable plugs fully into the video inputs as shown 0 Make sure the cable plugs are in video inputs of the same color e On the camera open the terminal cover and insert the cable plug fully into the camera terminal 3 Display images o Follow steps 3 4 in Playback on a High Definition TV H4161 to display images Correct display is not possible unless the camera video output format NTSC or PAL matches the TV format To change the video output format press the MEN U button and choose Video System on the ff tab
15. 5 button e Zoom is set to maximum wide angle and cannot be adjusted 2 Specify the duration of the shooting session o Turn the Z ring to choose the shooting duration 3 Secure the camera 0 Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still 4 Shoot O Press the shutter button all the way down Busy is displayed briefly and then shooting begins e To cancel shooting press the shutter button all the way down again Note that cancellation may take up to about 60 seconds If the camera runs out of battery power shooting stops and a composite image created from the images up to that point is saved There will be a delay before you can shoot again as the camera processes the images For easier viewing try choosing MENU e tab gt Night Display gt On MH92 before shooting Try switching to manual focus mode H481 to more accurately specify the focal position before shooting You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing 2 in steps 1 2 of Specific Scenes L155 touching BINA to access the setting screen touching I and then touching the same option or HN e Do not disturb the camera while shooting Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes Index 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appen
16. IS Mode to Off Q91 The speed you set may be lowered automatically as needed if the flash fires Orange display of aperture values when you press the shutter button halfway indicates that the settings deviate from standard exposure Adjust the shutter speed until the aperture value is displayed in white or use safety shift Q494 Images shot at high ISO speeds may look grainy Tv Time value You can customize camera operation so that turning the W dial changes the shutter speed 497 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode Index 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix 93 Specific Aperture Values Av Mode gt gt Still Images Set your preferred aperture value before shooting as follows The camera automatically adjusts the shutter speed to suit your aperture value For details on available aperture values see Aperture H4197 Enter Av mode Set the mode dial to Ay Ay E dl 1547 MED 34 55 A 2 Set the aperture value o Turn the ring to set the aperture value 1 Orange display of shutter speeds when you press the shutter button halfway indicates that the settings deviate from standard exposure Adjust the aperture value until the shutter speed is displayed in white or use safety shift see belo
17. On L192 before shooting You can also access the screen in step 2 by choosing MENU H430 gt Y tab gt Star Time Lapse Movie Setting To save each shot collected before the movie is created choose MENU 1130 gt tab gt Save s Stills gt On Note that these individual images are managed as a single group and during playback only the first image is displayed To indicate that the image is part of a group amp is displayed in the upper left of the screen If you erase a grouped image 11116 all images in the group are also erased Be careful when erasing images Try switching to manual focus mode H481 to more accurately specify the focal position before shooting Even if you specify Unlimited in Shooting Time and use an AC adapter kit sold separately 11159 shooting will stop after about 8 hours at most You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing 2 in steps 1 2 of Specific Scenes L155 touching BINA to access the setting screen touching x and then touching the same option or Ha Adjusting Colors gt gt Still Images gt Movies Colors can be manually adjusted in EM mode 20 0 Choose a shooting mode e Choose R H66 W 467 A L468 or s7 A69 2 Choose color adjustment o Press the 9 button and then choose EW8 in the menu 1129 3 Adjust the setting o Turn the ring or press the gt buttons to adjust
18. Select and send o The camera s SSID is displayed Choose a smartphone to connect to as described in steps 4 6 of Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button 128 5 Adjust the privacy setting o Press the 4 buttons or turn the dial to choose Yes and then press the 9 button e You can now use the smartphone to browse import or geotag images on the camera or shoot remotely 6 Send images o Turn the 4 dial to choose an image to send press the 4 buttons to choose Send this image and then press the button O Press the L amp Y gt buttons to choose Send and then press the 9 button Image transfer will begin The screen darkens during image transfer o Transfer completed is displayed after the image is sent and the image transfer screen is displayed again e To cancel the connection press the MENU button choose OK on the confirmation screen either press the 4 buttons or turn the 4B dial and then press the 9 button You can also use the smartphone to end the connection o To add multiple smartphones repeat the above procedures starting from step 1 All images in the camera can be viewed from the connected smartphone when you choose Yes in step 5 To keep camera images private so that they cannot be viewed from the smartphone choose No in step 5 Once you have registered a smartphone you can change privacy
19. Touch screen operations are not supported while the camera is connected to a television Q e When the camera and TV are connected you can also shoot while previewing shots on the larger screen of the TV To shoot follow the same steps as when using the camera screen However AF Point Zoom 1151 MF Point Zoom L181 MF Peaking 482 and Night Display L192 are not available Powering the Camera with Household Power gt gt Still Images gt Movies Powering the camera with AC Adapter Kit ACK DC110 sold separately eliminates the need to monitor the remaining battery level 4 Make sure the camera is off 2 Open the cover Follow step 1 in Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card L019 to open the memory card battery cover and then open the coupler cable port cover as shown 3 Insert the coupler e Holding the coupler with the terminals 1 facing as shown insert the coupler just as you would a battery pack following step 2 in Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card L219 Oo Make sure the coupler cable passes through the port 1 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 92 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories Index 10 Appendix lt gt 5 162 4 Close the cover o Lower the cover 1 and hold it down as you slide the s
20. 166 Configuring Print Settings gt gt Still Images f Access the printing screen Default O Follow steps 1 6 in Easy Print 11166 to access this screen A 1 copies Cropping J Default Paper Settings B Default Print 2 Configure the settings B Default MENU D O Press the a w buttons or turn the dial to choose an item and then choose an option by pressing the gt buttons Default Matches current printer settings Prints images with the date added Prints images with the file number added Prints images with both the date and file Both number added HI Default Matches current printer settings OS Uses information from the time of shooting to On print under optimal settings Red Eye 1 Corrects red eye No of El Copies Choose the number of copies to print Cropping 2 Specify a desired image area to print 167 Paper Specify the paper size layout and other details Settings 168 Cropping Images before Printing gt Still Images By cropping images before printing you can print a desired image area instead of the entire image vA Default FJ Default LP Choose Cropping o After following step 1 in Configuring Print Settings 4167 to access the printing screen choose Cropping and press the 5 button o A cropping frame is now displayed indicating the image area to print ah J 1 copies e Top ng
21. 22120 RAW images cannot be edited G e Images supported for cropping will have the same aspect ratio after cropping e Cropped images will have a lower resolution than uncropped images e f you crop still images shot using Face ID 0144 only the names of the people left in the cropped image will remain e To move the frame drag either image on the screen in step 3 e You can also resize frames by pinching in or out 4112 on the screen in step 3 Changing Image Color Tones My Colors gt gt Still Images You can adjust image colors and then save the edited image as a separate file For details on each option see Changing Image Color Tones My Colors 80 ms tm 4 Choose My Colors o Press the MENU button and then o o choose My Colors on the gt tab Resize N30 My Color 2 Choose an image o Press the 4 buttons or turn the dB dial to choose an image and then press the 9 button 3 Choose an option o Press the 4 buttons or turn the dB dial to choose an option and then press the 9 button ser e MS 4 Save as a new image and review O Follow steps 4 5 in Resizing Images 20120 1 Image quality of pictures you repeatedly edit this way will be a little lower each time and you may not be able to obtain the desired color Colors of RAW images cannot be edited Q e The color of images edited using this funct
22. 94 Macro focusing range 81 Magnified display 112 Manual focus focusing range 81 Manual movie mode 96 Memory cards 2 Recording time 196 Menu Basic operations 30 Table 181 Mercury lamp correction 49 Metering method 74 Miniature effect Shooting mode 60 Mobile device connection button 128 Monochrome shooting mode 63 Movies Editing 124 Image quality resolution frame rate 49 50 Recording time 196 Multi area White Balance 49 My Colors 80 122 N ND filter 78 Nostalgic shooting mode 59 P P shooting mode 73 Package contents 2 Photobook set up 171 PictBridge 160 166 Playback Viewing Portrait shooting mode 55 Poster effect shooting mode 58 Power 159 AC adapter kit Battery charger Battery pack Power saving 27 Printing 166 Program AE 73 Protecting 114 Q Quick focusing range 57 R RAW 90 Red eye correction 123 Remote shooting 148 Reset all 157 Resizing images 120 Resolution image size 49 Ring function selector button 97 99 Rotating 117 S Saving images to a computer 164 Screen Display language 22 Icons 179 180 Menu FUNC menu Menu SD SDHC SDXC memory cards Memory cards Searching 108 Self timer 41 2 second self timer 42 Customizing the self timer 42 Face self timer shooting mode 65 Wink self timer shooting mode 64 Sending images 143 Sending images to another camera 143 Sending images to a smartphone 128 Sending images to Web services
23. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode Index 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 104 Switching Display Modes gt gt Still Images gt Movies Press the V button to view other information on the screen or to hide the information For details on the information displayed see Playback Detailed Information Display 1180 No Information Display Simple Information Display DARE 100 0002 08 08 2014 10 00 00 Ay P 1 125 F4 0 amp 0 w 200 124 we WEA Ay amp ND PR E Qe FDO AL 5472x3648 2 26MB Detailed Information Display M0J6JE3 100 0002 08 08 2014 10 00 00 RGB Histogram GPS Information Display Overexposure Warning for Image Highlights gt gt Still Images gt Movies Washed out highlights in the image flash on the screen in detailed information display 11105 Histogram gt gt Still Images gt Movies e The graph in detailed information display Q105 is a histogram showing the distribution of brightness in the image The horizontal axis represents the degree of brightness and the vertical axis how much of the image is at each level of brightness Viewing the histogram is a way to check exposure o The histogram can also be accessed while shooting M99 L179 RGB Histogram GPS In
24. Checking People Detected in Face ID gt gt Still Images If you switch the camera to simple information display mode H4105 the names of up to five detected people registered in Face ID 44 will be displayed O Press the V button several times until simple information display is activated and then press the 4 buttons or turn the 4 dial to choose an image o Names will be displayed on detected people e f you prefer not to have names displayed on images shot using Face ID choose MENU 30 gt gt tab gt Face ID Info gt Name Display Off Browsing and Filtering Images Navigating through Images in an Index gt gt Still Images gt Movies By displaying multiple images in an index you can quickly find the images you are looking for Display images in an index o Move the zoom lever toward Emi to display images in an index Moving the lever again will increase the number of images shown To display fewer images move the zoom lever toward Q Fewer images are shown each time you move the lever 2 Choose an image o Turn the 4 dial to scroll through the images O Press the a Ww 4 buttons to choose an image Cr es o An orange frame is displayed around the selected image O Press the button to view the selected image in single image display e To deactivate the 3D display effect shown if you hold down the A W buttons or turn the y
25. Image Search o Press the MENU button and then choose Image Search on the tab 2130 2 Choose the first condition for image display or navigation O Press the a W buttons to choose a display filter o When gt or Mia is selected you can view only images matching this condition by pressing the 4 buttons or turning the 4 dial To perform an action for all of these images together press the 65 button and go to step 4 Choose the second condition and check the images found e When you have selected or 5 as the first condition choose the second by pressing the 4 buttons and then turn the dB dial to view only matching images e To switch to filtered image display press the 9 button and go to step 4 e When you have selected 1 as the first condition press the 9 button and press the a Ww 4 buttons on the next screen to choose a person Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode Index 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 108 4 View the filtered images Using the Control Ring to Jump between Before Use e Images matching your conditions are Images displayed in yellow frames To view only these images press the q buttons or gt gt Still Images gt Mo
26. M Av Tv P A AUTO 1 D L e R R a USED IAE IA ae er EJ C M Ay Tv P AUTO O0 D LE 03 03 89 ile Ll taj ES a me RAE UET IE COT E Er OTP 5 Tv Av M and C Mode A C M Av Tv P AUTO 1 D L 3 2 89 MA Shadow Correction 478 GAY S F 8BIEENMDI 90 3 0 4A 9 GIAN 6 Playback Mode Co kalidad i C M Av Tv P 8 AUTO NDLR k 7 Wi Fi Functions a ee eee C M Av Ty PS AUTO 0 2 0283 BR RY An BE 2 R E od amp CO B 8 Mr E 8 Setting Menu Ein D a m C M Av Tv P a AUTO OW D L RA RA e 9 Accessories AE RETA AE E CE 2 14 21 CMA Tv PS AUTO uD E Ex x m 4 C2 Fa a ISO Speed 1175 TE n AUTO White Balance Correction 79 Index C M Av Tv P a AUTO ON LR C M Av Tv P lt AUTO O D L 02 0 R A TE E AEM UAAR VE a r E A An bc S i R E 0 3 Oas IAE RIOR 7 R N a lt gt 183 Underwater White Balance Correction LL157 C M Av Tv P 8 AUTO O10 D 1L 03 03 89 MR A EB R AE IM I8 0 5 0 4 2 4d 2 P My om E oN a Color Adjustment Biaxial 1170 C M Av Tv P ast AUTO OD LIRA A si GE EG ES MR 9 9 3 0 4 2 d 2 P E ON m My Colors 480 Arr C M Av Tv P a AUTO OD ENE A M E EP A E E oN By AN Se Bw Ap 8 Ap 4p 4g Sp Act C M Av Tv P lt AUTO OW D L C3 C3 OASIS IMA d h CO B 8 gt A E o Bracketing H476 L182 eat C M Av Tv P as AUTO
27. Mobile Device Connect Button Not all NFC compatible smartphones have an N Mark N For details refer to the smartphone user manual Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi Fi Menu These steps show how to use the camera as an access point but you can also use an existing access point 132 Install CameraWindow O Follow step 1 in Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button 4128 to install CameraWindow on a smartphone 2 Access the Wi Fi menu o Press the P gt button to turn the camera on O Press the a button O f a screen requesting the device nickname is displayed enter the nickname H4128 3 Choose C o Press the 4 buttons or turn the db dial to choose L and then press the 63 button Connect to smartphone a ov Da men gt ane 4 Choose Add a Device ii o Press the A W buttons or turn the 8 dial to choose Add a Device and then press the button Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode Wi Fi Functions Index 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 130 Waiting to connect Connect target device to this access point and start app SSID XXXX_XXXXX_XXXX Switch Network Connecting Connected smart device can now operate camera and ac cess images on memory card Yes 100 0002
28. Tas o A white frame on the person s face indicates that the face is recognized Make sure a white frame is displayed on the face and then shoot o If the face is not recognized you cannot register face information Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Index Camera Basics 92 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 44 o After Register is displayed press 5 Continue registering face information Before Use Add to Registry the q gt buttons or turn the 4B dial e To register up to 4 more points of face E to choose OK and then press the information expressions or angles Basic Guide Fil a button repeat step 2 Register o The Edit Profile screen is displayed e Registered faces are more easily Cancel OK Advanced Guide recognized if you add a variety of face information In addition to a head on 3 Register the person s name and angle add a slight side angle a shot Camera Basics birthday when smiling and shots inside and outside Auto Mode o Press the button to access the 2 Hybrid Auto Mode keyboard and then enter the name l l l 32 1 The flash will not fire when following step 2 Other Shootina Modes mu gt e If you do not register a birthday in step 3 Babies or Children icons 3 E e To register a birthday
29. Touch Response and then Units choose High Electronic Level Video System Touch Operation On uch Respons Higi Setting Copyright Information to Record in Images To record the author s name and copyright details in images set this information beforehand as follows e Choose Copyright Info and then press the 9 button O Press the a w buttons or turn the dial to choose Enter Author s Name or Enter Copyright Details Press the ven gt button to access the keyboard and enter the name 0132 o Press the MENU button When Accept changes is displayed choose Yes either press the q buttons or turn the 8 dial and then press the 9 button o The information set here will now be recorded in images Copyright Info Display Copyright Info Enter Author s Name Enter Copyright Details Delete Copyright Info Q e To check the information entered choose Display Copyright Info on the screen above and then press the O button You can also use the software 163 to enter change and delete copyright information Some characters entered with the software may not display on the camera but will be correctly recorded in images e You can check copyright information recorded in images by using the software once you save the images to a computer Deleting All Copyright Information You can delete both the author s name and copyright details at the sa
30. button 2 Choose O Press the 4 buttons or turn the dB dial to choose and then press the button o The selected clip is played back repeatedly A l i 3 Confirm erasure o Press the 4 buttons or turn the 4h dial to choose OK and then press the button Erase this clip o The clip is erased and the short movie is sl overwritten Q e ff is not displayed if you select a clip when the camera is connected to a printer Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode Index 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 126 Available Wi Fi Features Before Use You can send and receive images and control the camera remotely by Basic Guide connecting it to these devices and services via Wi Fi Wi Fi Functions Send images wirelessly from the camera to a variety of compatible devices and use the camera with Web services Smartphones and Tablets Send images to smartphones and tablet computers that have Wi Fi functions You can also shoot remotely and geotag your shots from a smartphone or tablet For convenience in this manual smartphones tablets and other compatible devices are collectively referred to as smartphones Computer Use software to save camera images to a computer connected via
31. choose IC change the settings and then repeat steps 2 3 These setting details are not applied in other shooting modes e To clear information you have saved to IC and restore default values turn the mode dial to IC and choose Reset All 4157 Saving Commonly Used Shooting Menu Items My Menu gt gt Still Images gt Movies You can save up to five commonly used shooting menu items on the xk tab By customizing the xk tab you can access to these items quickly from a single screen O T x My Menu settings My Menu settings Select items Set default view m 4 Access the setting screen o Press the MENU button choose My Menu settings on the xk tab and then press the button 430 2 Configure the setting O Press the A w buttons or turn the 4 dial to choose Select items and then press the 9 button e Choose up to five menu items to save either press the A W buttons or turn the 4 dial and then press the button o Y is displayed e To cancel saving press the 5 button V is no longer displayed o Press the MENU button My Menu settings Select items Sort Set default view 3 Rearrange menu items as needed O Press the aA w buttons or turn the db dial to choose Sort and then press the 9 button e Choose a menu item to move either press the A W buttons or turn the di dial and then press the 69 bu
32. contact a Canon Customer Support Help 92 Auto Mode Desk Hybrid Auto Mode Receiving failed 3 Other Shooting Modes Insufficient space on card e There is not enough free space on the memory card in the target camera to receive images Erase images to create space on the memory card or insert a 4 P Mode memory card with sufficient space Receiving failed 5 Tv Av M and C Mode Memory card locked e The write protect tab of the memory card in the camera to receive the images is Pl kM set to the locked position Slide the write protect tab to the unlocked position Bebes Receiving failed 7 Wi Fi Functions Naming error e When the highest folder number 999 and the highest image number 9999 have been reached on the receiving camera images cannot be received 8 Setting Menu Insufficient space on server e Delete unnecessary images uploaded to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to create Q Accessories space e Save the images sent via Image Sync 111145 to your computer 10 Appendix Check network settings e Check to make sure your computer can connect to the Internet with the current network settings Index lt gt 5 178 Grid lines H99 Hybrid Auto mode 1136 Before Use On Screen Information 20 Blink detection 1151 29 21 AF frame 483 Spot AE point 30 frame 4474 31 Touch Shutter 042 Basic Guide Shooting Information Display 22 DR correction 4177 32 Camera shake warning R437 ee es
33. either press the es 4 buttons or turn the dial and Low Level Format then press the button Cancel OK 3 Format the memory card Format All data on the memory e To begin the formatting process press the A W buttons or turn the di dial OK to choose OK and then press the 9 button card will be erased o When formatting is finished Memory card formatting complete is displayed Press the button O e Formatting or erasing data on a memory card only changes file management information on the card and does not erase the data completely When transferring or disposing of memory cards take steps to protect personal information if necessary as by physically destroying cards G e The total card capacity indicated on the formatting screen may be less than the advertised capacity Low Level Formatting Perform low level formatting in the following cases Memory card error is displayed the camera is not working correctly card image reading writing is slower continuous shooting is slower or movie recording suddenly stops Low level formatting erases all data on a memory card Before low level formatting copy images on the memory card to a computer or take other steps to back them up e On the screen in step 1 of Formatting Memory Cards 154 press the eee A W buttons or turn the dB dial to 32KB used choose Low Level Format and then press the 4 buttons to
34. eo To return to the menu screen press the IMENU button e Rotation is not possible when Auto Rotate is set to Off 01118 nl d e On the screen in step 2 you can also touch R13 to rotate images or touch WMA to return to the menu screen Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode Index 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 117 Deactivating Auto Rotation Follow these steps to deactivate automatic image rotation which rotates images based on the current camera orientation ee mt o Press the MENU button choose Auto as Rotate on the tab and then choose Index Effect Off 130 Scroll Display Group Images Auto Rotate 1 Images cannot be rotated 117 when you set Auto Rotate to Off Additionally images already rotated will be displayed in the original orientation In Smart Shuffle 1113 mode even if Auto Rotate is set to Off images shot vertically will be displayed vertically and rotated images will be displayed in the rotated orientation Tagging Images as Favorites gt gt Still Images gt Movies You can organize images by tagging them as favorites By choosing a category in filtered playback you can restrict the following operations to all of those images e Viewing 11
35. movies shot at zoom factors shown in blue will look grainy eo When you recompose shots the focus brightness and colors will be automatically adjusted 3 Finish shooting o Press the movie button again to stop shooting The camera beeps twice as recording stops Index Recording will stop automatically when the memory card becomes full e The flash firing during shots indicates that the camera has automatically attempted to ensure optimal colors in the main subject and background Multi area White Balance Shooting Movies Before Use o Press the movie button The camera Basic Guide a Advanced Guide time 1 Camera Basics 92 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 35 Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode gt gt Still Images gt Movies You can make a short movie of the day just by shooting still images The camera records 2 4 second clips of scenes before each shot which are later combined in a digest movie Enter 34 mode o Follow step 2 in Shooting Smart Auto 1134 and choose gx 12341 281 TAB 34 55 La 2 Compose the shot 2 a Follow steps 3 4 in Shooting Smart Auto 1134 to compose the shot and focus For more impressive digest movies aim the camera at subjects about four seconds before
36. on the Edit Profile 1138 will not be displayed in AUTO mode Input Birthday 4 P Mode screen choose Birthday either press os phthalate the A W buttons or turn the di dial os o8 1986 and then press the button Q You can overwrite registered face info and add face info later if 9 Tv Av M and C Mode o Press the 4 buttons to choose an you have not filled all 5 face info slots L144 ser KOA BEM Cancel option 6 Playback Mode O Press the a wW buttons or turn the db dial to specify the date shooting 7 Wi Fi Functions o When finished press the button A If you register a person ahead of time the camera will prioritize that person as the main subject and optimize focus brightness and color for that person when shooting 8 Setting Menu Edit Profile 4 Save the settings neste o Press the a W buttons or turn the mart aes an F nn dial to choose Save and then press the el bis ee AE When you point the camera toward a 9 7 Wn 08 08 1985 E button l subject the names of up to 3 registered o After a message is displayed press the A es E eee aay ae 10 Abpendix m5 etected tt t th ial t 4 buttons or turn the 4 dial to kooo a choose Yes and then press the button o Displayed names will be recorded in still images Even if people are detected but their names are not displayed the names up to 5 people will be recorded in the image lt gt
37. settings for it on the camera L149 Connections require that a memory card be in the camera Once you have connected to devices via the Wi Fi menu recent destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi Fi menu You can easily connect again by pressing the A W buttons to choose the device and then pressing the 9 button To add a new device display the device selection screen by pressing the 4 buttons and then configure the setting If you prefer not to display recent target devices choose MENU L130 fT tab gt Wi Fi Settings gt Target History gt Off You can also send multiple images at once and change the image size before sending 4144 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode Wi Fi Functions Index 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 131 Using Another Access Point When connecting the camera to a smartphone with the L button or through the Wi Fi menu you can also use an existing access point Prepare for the connection o Access the Waiting to connect screen Either follow steps 1 3 in Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button 128 or steps 1 4 in Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi Fi Menu 11130 2 Connect the smartphone to the access point 3 Choose Switch Network o P
38. subject o 1 is the current zoom factor 1 Moving the zoom lever will display the zoom bar which indicates the zoom position The color of the zoom bar will change depending on the zoom range White range optical zoom range where the image will not appear grainy Yellow range digital zoom range where the image is not noticeably grainy ZoomPlus Blue range digital zoom range where the image will appear grainy Because the blue range will not be available at some resolution settings H449 the maximum zoom factor can be achieved by following step 1 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Index Camera Basics 92 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 40 e To deactivate digital zoom choose MENU 0130 Y tab gt Digital Zoom Off Shooting at Preset Focal Lengths Step Zoom gt gt Still Images gt Movies You can shoot at preset focal lengths of 24 28 35 50 85 or 100 mm 35mm film equivalent This is convenient when you want to shoot at the angle of view of those focal lengths e To change the focal length from 24 to 28 mm turn the ring counterclockwise until it clicks Keep turning the Z ring to increase the focal length which changes to 35 50 85 and 100 mm at each click 1 Step zoom is n
39. 138 Sepia tone images 80 Servo AF 85 Shadow Correct 78 Shooting Shooting date time Date time Shooting information 99 179 Slideshow 112 Smart Shuffle 113 Smart Shutter shooting mode 63 Smile shooting mode 63 Snow shooting mode 56 Soft focus shooting mode 62 Software Installation 133 164 Saving images to a computer 164 Sounds 151 Standard movie mode 71 Star shooting mode 66 Star nightscape shooting mode 67 Star portrait shooting mode 66 Star time lapse movie shooting mode 69 Star trails shooting mode 68 Stereo AV cable 160 161 162 Strap 2 18 Super vivid shooting mode 58 T Terminal 161 162 166 Touch Actions 119 Touch AF 86 Touch Shutter 42 Toy camera effect shooting mode 61 Traveling with the camera 152 Troubleshooting 173 TV display 161 Tv shooting mode 93 U Underwater macro focusing range 57 Underwater shooting mode 56 V Viewing 24 Image search 108 Index display 107 Jump display 109 Magnified display 112 Single image display 24 Slideshow 112 Smart Shuffle 113 TV display 161 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 199 W White balance color 78 Wi Fi functions 127 Wi Fi menu 130 Wind filter 37 Wink self timer shooting mode 64 World clock
40. 180 Q e When Display Time H452 is set to Off or Quick Display Info is set to Off and cannot be changed e By pressing the V button while an image is displayed after shooting you can switch the display information Note that the settings of Display Info are not changed You can also erase images by pressing the f button Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Index Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 53 Other Shooting Modes Shoot more effectively in various scenes and take shots enhanced with unique image effects or captured using special functions Enjoying a Variety of Images from Each Shot Creative Shot gt gt Still Images The camera determines the subject and shooting conditions automatically applying special effects and recomposing the shot to emphasize the subject Six still images are recorded for each shot You can capture multiple still images with effects using camera determined settings So Enter Dj mode Set the mode dial to Dy Shoot Press the shutter button all the way down As you shoot the shutter sound is played three times After the six images are displayed in succession they are displayed simultaneously for about two seconds To keep the images displayed until
41. 2 Default Paper Settings B Default Print 8 Default enw gt o To resize the frame move the zoom lever e To move the frame press the a w1 4 D buttons o To rotate the frame turn the dB dial o When finished press the button o se OK 101 3 gO Cancel ist ox agm 3 Print the image e Follow step 7 in Easy Print 11166 to print Cropping may not be possible at small image sizes or at some aspect ratios 2 Adjust the cropping frame as needed Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories Index 10 Appendix lt gt 5 167 Default FS Default 1 copies Cropping Y Default aper Settings B Default Print B Default y E B Paper Size Default 10x14 8cm DEI Cancel Next DM E Paper Type Default Previous Next Y y B Page Layout Default Bordered Borderless N up 2 ID Photo Previous ok Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing gt gt Still Images Choose Paper Settings o After following step 1 in Configuring Print Settings 11167 to access the printing screen choose Paper Settings and press the button 2 Choose a paper size O Press the a w buttons or turn the db dial to choose an option and then press the
42. 3 button 3 Choose a type of paper O Press the a w buttons or turn the 4 dial to choose an option and then press the 3 button 4 Choose a layout O Press the a w buttons or turn the db dial to choose an option e When choosing N up press the 4 gt buttons to specify the number of images per sheet O Press the button 5 Print the image Prints images for identification purposes ID Photo Only available for images with a resolution of L and an aspect ratio of 3 2 Fixed Size Choose the print size Choose from 3 5 x 5 in postcard or wide format prints Printing ID Photos ID Photo Long Side 25mm Short Side 20mm EG Cropping e ES ueno Cancel gt gt Still Images Choose ID Photo Following steps 1 4 in Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing 11168 choose ID Photo and press the button 2 Choose the long and short side length O Press the a w buttons or turn the dial to choose an item Choose the length by pressing the 4 buttons and then press the button Index 3 Choose the printing area O Follow step 2 in Cropping Images before Printing 11167 to choose the printing area 4 Print the image Available Layout Options Before Use Default Matches current printer settings Basic Guide Prints with blank space around the image Borderless edge to edge printing Choose how many imag
43. 47 Erasing Registered Information You can erase information face info names birthdays registered to Face ID However names recorded in previously shot images will not be erased 4 Access the Erase Info screen Face 1D Settings Face ID O Follow step 1 in Registering Face ID Add to Registry OREA Information 144 and choose Erase Erase Info Info N gt 2 Choose the name of the person Erase Registered Person whose info you want to erase Y E o Press the a W 4 buttons or turn Amy the 4B dial to choose the name of a o person to erase and then press the button o After Erase is displayed press the 4 buttons or turn the dB dial to choose OK and then press the button f you erase a registered person s info you will not be able to display their name H4107 overwrite their info 11111 or search images for them 108 Q e You can also erase names in image information H4111 Image Customization Features Changing the Aspect Ratio gt Still Images Change the image aspect ratio ratio of width to height as follows o Press the 9 button choose 3 2 in the menu and choose the desired option 129 Once the setting is complete the screen aspect ratio will be updated o To restore the original setting repeat this process but choose 3 2 Used for display on widescreen HDTVs or similar display devices Native asp
44. AE E IA CES wien Oy NL Av Tv Settings 193 L194 Sree name Cc Av Tv P E AUTO ON 12 21 EB 8 Aperture Value EIA ETE NICO B C A S d IP 9 Accessories JE i CM Ay Ty Ea AUTO N D Lie EB al 8 A Cc M Av Tv Pr AUTO OU D L 3 3 BD Shaler Speen A ENT Mo 1B 38 HDR n COD MA Index E C M Av Tv P 8 AUTO O1 D L E3 R ECM MAE t CAN PI Bee ARI a eB COD eaP E N 5A n C M Av Tv P d8 AUTO DE R 4 q PA S131 hc Br 2 EDR 180 209 3 00 2 8 4 AP e a 181 Program Shift 1174 C M Av Tv P 8 AUTO O1 D L 03 02 RA Ar B i 6 ee ADR d h 1 0 14 2 4 2 P My om he a AE Lock FE Lock 71 174 LL 89 C M Av Tv P A AUTO OD LRR E E ER B C 8 8d E ma La AF Lock when assigned to the PXS or movie button 1187 C M Av Tv P ci AUTO O B 2 R CA 7 1B 4 8 MD 9 9 3 0D0 4 2 4d 2A P Mj om Res Focusing Range L157 H81 1181 MA C M Av Tv P e AUTO ON B E 2 g l NB cB ERO B C eii C M Av Tv P 38 AUTO O B Ee 0 RR DISPIB 018 ADR 9 3 8 0 4 2 4 2A P E e a G O C M Av Tv P A AUTO 0 DLRA R aleae 6 AE AAS C a r T My om he MF C M Av Tv P 2 AUTO 00 D 1 02 0213 R EA AAA Y Y R 004 m My om Me Move AF Frame 1184 C M Av TV P 8 AUTO Ou M E IEA ERE CO View JEJE TAS Touch AF 1186 C M Av Tv P 5 AUTO O10
45. AUTO maximum ISO speed can be specified in a range of 400 12800 and sensitivity can be specified in a range of three levels Access the setting screen o Press the MENU button choose ISO Auto Settings on the gj tab and then press the button 1130 2 Configure the setting ISO Auto Settings Max ISO Speed 6400 Choose a menu item to configure and then choose the desired option 430 Rate of Change Standard e You can also access the ISO Auto Settings screen when choosing the ISO speed in the FUNC menu by pressing the IMENU button Changing the Noise Reduction Level High ISO NR You can choose from 3 levels of noise reduction Standard High Low This function is especially effective when shooting at high ISO speeds o Press the MENU button choose High ISO NR on the gg tab and then choose the desired option L130 Safety MF On MF Peaking Settings Flash Settings ISO Auto Settings High ISO NR E Q e Not available with M or R Doo Auto Exposure Bracketing AEB Shooting gt gt Still Images Three consecutive images are captured at different exposure levels standard exposure underexposure and then overexposure each time you shoot You can adjust the amount of underexposure and overexposure relative to standard exposure from 2 to 2 stops in 1 3 stop increments Choose A o Press the 9 button choose KF in
46. Appendix lt gt 5 202
47. Assignable Functions Favorites Tag images as favorites or untag the image Switch to displaying the next image tagged as a favorite Switch to displaying the previous image tagged as a favorite Switch to displaying the first image with the next shooting date Next Favorite Previous Favorite Next Date Switch to displaying the first image with the previous shooting date Start Smart Shuffle playback Previous Date Smart Shuffle To Camera To Smartphone Access the Wi Fi connection screen For Wi Fi details see Wi Fi Functions 127 Erase Protect Rotate To Computer To Printer To Web Service Slideshow Editing Still Images 1 Image editing 441120 11123 is only available when the memory card has sufficient free space e You can access editing screens for various functions by touching an image after choosing the function in the menu e When LAN is shown on an editing screen you can touch NU instead of pressing the MENU button if you prefer e When Al is shown on an editing screen you can touch Saul instead of pressing the 9 button if you prefer Resizing Images gt gt Still Images Save a copy of images at a lower resolution Choose Resize o Press the MENU button and choose Resize on the BJ tab L130 mo tT Photobook Set up i Contrast Red Eye Correction Cropping Resize 2 Choose an image o Press the 4 buttons
48. Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix Index Flash Settings 452 489 1190 L495 Flash Mode Auto AENA EIA TAS RDA amp rary b M Sus Manual C M Av Tv P cs AUTO O N D L A n a ST EDR 9 lt BIA Pa ON Flash Exp AT C M Av Tv P A AUTO ODER aa E I E S E A Flash Output C M Av Tv P 4 AUTO O1 D L 70 An B Be MAI 8 D 0 4 2 A lu R Shutter Sync C M Av Tv P lt AUTO OU P O alka IE EEE DA Os Sd B C a Red Eye Lamp On eg S N AF R R R ae 3 b SN YY sd aP C M Av Tv P g AUTO ON D L 8 10 58 A D BI SS MR 80 9 23 007 4 8 E m off d ANP C M Av Tv P a AUTO O A CIC BR R A g w i e 10R 90 3 0 2 2 1d ANP Safety FE On C M Av Tv P A A HA A A B ME RE D a Oa 5 M m Bl a Off AE ISO Auto Settings 476 Max ISO Speed C M Av Tv P AUTO N D RR RA Bn ea WIDE HR E G CO a 2 IP ED o Rate of Change C M Av Tv P s AUTO ND ERRAR An bc B S ROE ad CO 2 IP A a m High ISO NR L476 Low Standard High C M Av Tv P A AUTO O D LRA R R An B IA S RE D a COD AP E ON a Hg Lamp Corr 1149 On Off C M Av Tv P E AUTO O0 9 20 02 02 BB R A A BOU BIE IMI 90 D COD 2 d BiB 5 My om E o a
49. D LU 7 8 B IA O B MIO 1100141214 Ble es pk Face Select 1185 C M Av Tv P 8 AUTO O10 D L 2 R DABA IE ADR 8 5 0 4 2 4 2 P J M Swe Change Display 1129 C M Av Tv P e AUTO Ot EAA RA CIE K b s S E C a T A M m Sn T e Y o 4 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode 2 Ma is set with MF AF lock or 3 3 Not available but switches to 42 in some cases 4 FE lock not available in G flash mode 5 Only with ISO Auto selected 6 When AFL is assigned to the RN button or movie button 99 7 Only when MF is selected 8 Only available when faces are detected 9 Only in manual focus mode Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 9 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 182 E FUNC Menu 125 12800 Before Use C M Av Tv P cx AUTO ON B W CICR BRA alee C MAV TUP AUTO SI E py oe C M Av Tv P AUTO O1 D L 03 2 09 MA pl UPA cB EMI DIANDAZ P d AN Pam al Y a es eee Camera Basics C M Av Tv P cs AUTO O1 D L 13 02 89 88 SAJTO ARa i AE A UA Ca Tr e 9 Auto Mode C M Ay Tv P 0 AUTO O0 D LE C3 C2 BB AR Eno Mo DIENTE eB te 0 VAIS INTACTA e a aI Mx AE pw a 3 Other Shooting Modes E C
50. Display cccccoonccononocnnnncconocccnnccnnnonos 155 Electronic Level Calibration cccccsssssssscceeeeeeseeessseeeeeeeeeens 155 Resetting the Electronic Level ocoonocnnccionnccnncnncanonnnss 156 Deactivating Touch Screen Operations ccccsseesseeeeeeeeeeees 156 Increasing Touch Screen Panel Sensitivity oo 156 Setting Copyright Information to Record in Images 156 Deleting All Copyright Information ccccceeeeesseeeeeeeeees 156 Checking Certification LOgOS oooccconcccccooonccononnnnnononananonos 157 Display Language MMMM e 157 Adjusting Other SettindS usina 157 Restoring Defaults ccoconiossciints ni dd caia 157 9 Accessories ssssssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn 158 System MAP salas 158 Optional ACCESSOTICS ccccccsseceeececeesseeeeeeeeesseeeeseenanseeenes 159 POWerSuUpplSS ornato 159 Fe URE ccnp ace ie O oe daceen noe Gade ei wcuntlaatelyavicuto ceca betenieas 160 Other Accessories venian dc dica 160 PU POPE Io y A 160 Using Optional ACCessSoOrIi8sS cccccoconnononconnnnoncnnnonononaannannnos 161 Playback on a TV escaneo testear 161 Playback on a High Definition TW oooooccocoococccncnnncnnnnnnannnnns 161 Playback on a Standard Definition TV oooccccccoonnono 162 Powering the Camera with Household Power cooc 162 Using the SOMWANS ii 163 DOW ANG o a A Up 0
51. Follow steps 1 2 in Image Effects Creative Filters 1158 and choose Eo 2 Choose a color tone 9 EE al 1527 ap ED 34355 F e Turn the ring to choose a color tone o A preview is shown of how your shot will look with the effect applied 3 Shoot Standard Shots resemble toy camera images Images have a warmer tone than with Standard Images have a cooler tone than with Standara e Try taking some test shots first to make sure you obtain the desired results Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes Index 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 61 Making Subjects Stand Out Background Defocus gt gt Still Images You can shoot subjects so that they stand out from the background Two consecutive images are captured with settings optimized for background defocus The background is defocused through lens effects and subject and scene based image processing Choose a o Follow steps 1 2 in Image Effects Creative Filters 1158 and choose 2 Shoot Hold the camera steady as you shoot Two consecutive images are captured when you press the shutter button all the way down o A blinking 44 icon indicates that the images could not be processed 1 Excessive motion blur or ce
52. Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix Index lt gt 5 174 Recording to the memory card takes too long or continuous shooting is slower e Use the camera to perform low level formatting of the memory card H154 Shooting settings or FUNC menu settings are not available e Available setting items vary by shooting mode Refer to Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode FUNC Menu and Shooting Tab 181 11186 The Babies or Children icon does not display e The Babies and Children icons will not display if the birthday is not set in face information H444 If the icons still do not display even when you set the birthday re register face information L144 or make sure that the date time are set correctly L11152 Touch AF or Touch Shutter does not work e Touch AF or Touch Shutter will not work if you touch the edges of the screen Touch closer to the center of the screen Shooting Movies The elapsed time shown is incorrect or recording is interrupted e Use the camera to format the memory card or switch to a card that supports high speed recording Note that even if the elapsed time display is incorrect the length of movies on the memory card corresponds to the actual recording time A154 1196 is displayed and shooting stops automatically e The camera s internal memory buffer filled up as the camera could not record to the memory card quickly enough Try one o
53. Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode Wi Fi Functions Index 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 128 PE Conwext Mulion 3 Choose L eee 6 Choose a smartphone to connect to Before Use g El o Press the 4 buttons or turn the A ema e Choose the smartphone either by dial to choose and then press the 63 J pressing the a w buttons or by turning Basic Guide Register a destination for button the dial and then press the E one touch connection Search complete button MENU gt TO Ad d Guid o After a connection is established with EERE T The camera s SSID is displayed the smartphone the smartphone name l is displayed on the camera This screen Camera Basics Connect target device to this will close in about one minute access point and start app 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode SSID XXXX_ XXXXX XXXX 7 Import images Switch Network o Use the smartphone to import images Other Shooting Modes from the camera to the smartphone 3 E o Use the smartphone to end the 4 Connect the smartphone to the connection the camera will automatically ga lees network turn off o In the smartphone s Wi Fi setting menu D Tuan tl Liles choose the SSID network name 1 When using NFC keep the following points in mind displayed on the camera to establish a Avoid strong impact between the camera and s
54. M Av Tv P e AUTO ANDER e A A CIR E RERE D Eo T e A E oN a 4 3 T C M Av Tv P AUTO 01 D L 02 03 89 RA A A BD UDI EE HDR 9 5 81 COD IAE DL 1 1 4 5 C M Av Tv P cx AUTO Ou 90 2 2082 BB aiea E RTE O E9 SIO Al MIA E ON Image Type 490 JPEG M Se C M Av Tv P AUTO0 01 D L 03 03 89 84 DUDA EMM DD 10 1812 dQ ED fe Resolution RAE L ea eae o eae s aa F rR a M1 M2 S C M Av Tv P 5 AUTO 1 D L 3 3 89 A A A AZE ue e HDR ep 8 CO amp Sg aI gt Y b aa 91 ATAR AUTO O D UL C2 3 8 R MEME MOMIA B C 2 TEN Y 5 My m E o a C M Av Tv P A AUTO A DE R A E E U 10 4 12 r QI a PY aN gt t Movie Quality 50 0 Gd C M Av Tv P 8 AUTO O1 D L A A EIN AE iS HR 9 lt 9 AAN ral DEN C M Av Tv P a AUTO OM D L 13 02 89 8 A E dG E A E a T e E el THD EMD yA EM C M Av Tv P a AUTO ES Co Ba ARa F B AR S d 37 0 4 2 4 2A P B fw 7 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index lt gt 185 4 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode 2 Advanced settings not available Off peed 3
55. M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories Index 10 Appendix lt gt 160 e On the camera open the terminal cover Before Use and insert the cable plug fully into the camera terminal Using Optional Accessories gt gt Still Images gt Movies Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Playback on a TV gt gt Still Images gt Movies By connecting the camera to a TV you can view your shots on the larger screen of the TV For details on connection or how to switch inputs refer to the TV manual 3 Turn the TV on and switch to video 2 Tog AE Mode input e Switch the TV input to the video input you 3 Other Shooting Modes e Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on connected the cable to in step 2 a TV H180 4 Turn the camera on 4 P Mode o Press the gt button to turn the camera on Playback on a High Definition TV 5 Tv Av M and C Mode Images from the camera are now displayed on the TV Nothing is gt gt Still Images gt Movies You can view your shots on a TV by connecting the camera to an HDTV displayed on the camera screen SOS with a commercially available HDMI cable not exceeding 2 5 m with e When finished turn off the camera and a Type D terminal on the camera end Movies shot at a resolution of TV before disconnecting the cable 7 Wi Fi Functions Eo ry Ea or Exp can be viewed in high definition
56. O D E03 C2 RA A D8 HRE D ACIE T e P E Y C M Av Tv P 58 AUTO O1 D L 03 02 R An B BIE MIO 0 5 Oasa aa Y a kh C M Av Tv P AUTO OW D L CB BA A B bc IES MAI 8 0 COD 81 1d aI My om SL Self Timer 12141 Before Use GR C M Av Tv P AUTO Ou 1 93 C2 BY Bee Cuide a al MBE HR Cp By OD R C I IO Camera Basics C M Av Tv P 4 AUTO O1 D 1 0 A a n TST Ar 2 E Auto Mode MIR 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Self Timer Settings 442 Delay s 3 Other Shooting Modes C M Av Tv P es AUTO O B O B 4 P Mode A A BD DIESE HDR ad 3 00 24 2 d 2 P A rad Shots s 5 Tv Av M and C Mode C M Av Tv P lt AUTO O B CIRIA Pl E back Mod 1 I ie EMO D C a r I se A 7 Metering Method 474 7 Wi Fi Functions e C M Av Tv P AUTO O0 D L 03 2 BB IRA IK E AE ASES 2 4 2 F E OY a 9 Accessories C M Av Tv P 5 AUTO O0 D LD 03 02 B9 BR BAN 9 e S HDR S d 0 8 et Index E ON a mm 8 Setting Menu lt gt 184 ND C M Av Tv P 7 AUTO ON D L ts Co D A AI 8 a SS ADR 9 S S 00 4 Staal E Mr C El AV Tv P es SE AUTO ON D UL 02 02 87 A x MI ALE e S HDR 90 lt 9 3 00 amp 8 4 ANP W Still Image Aspect Ratio 11148 16 9 C M Av Tv P AUTO O1 D L 0 8 AR AY 9 B31 Qc IEA ad 3 00 28 2 eg CE E ON 3 2 C
57. P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix Index lt gt 5 193 Specifications Wi Fi Before Use Standards TTA o ae Basic Guide Camera Specifications gt a T E TRTA ransmission modulation 11g n Methods DSSS modulation IEEE 802 11b Infrastructure mode Ad hoc mode 1 Supports Wi Fi Protected Setup Modes 2 Wi Fi CERTIFIED IBSS 2 Auto Mode Supported 1 11 PC2201 or 1 13 PC2155 Hybrid Auto Mode Channels Model numbers indicated in parentheses E WEP WPA PSK AES TKIP 3 Other Shooting Modes y WPA2 PSK AES TKIP 4 P Mode Camera Effective aa Pixels Max Approx 20 2 million pixels Lens Focal 4 2x zoom 8 8 W 36 8 T mm Length 35mm film equivalent 24 W 100 T mm Communication Camera Basics 3 0 type color TFT LCD LCD Monitor Effective Pixels Approx 1 040 000 dots Design rule for Camera File system DPOF File Format version 1 1 compliant Still Images Exif 2 3 JPEG RAW CR2 Canon a i Original Digital Zoom Focal Length 35mm equivalent Movies MP4 Video MPEG 4 AVC H 264 Audio MPEG 4 AAC LC stereo 24 403 2 mm Hi speed USB Digital Zoom Standard Represents the combined focal length 6 Playback Mode HDMI output of optical and digital zoom Interface Analog audio output stereo Digital Tele Converter 1 6x 38 4 160 0 mm 7 Wi Fi Functions Analog video output NTS
58. Place the strap around your wrist 8 Setting Menu When shooting keep your arms close to your body and hold the camera securely to prevent it from moving If you have raised the flash do not rest your fingers 10 Appendix on it O Accessories Index 18 Charging the Battery Pack Before use charge the battery pack with the included charger Be sure to charge the battery pack initially because the camera is not sold with the battery pack charged insert the battery pack o After aligning the 4 marks on the battery pack and charger insert the battery pack by pushing it in 1 and down 2 2 Charge the battery pack CB 2LH Flip out the plug 1 and plug the charger into a power outlet 2 o CB 2LHE Plug the power cord into the charger then plug the other end into a power outlet e The charging lamp turns orange and charging begins e When charging is finished the lamp turns green 3 Remove the battery pack o After unplugging the battery charger remove the battery pack by pushing it in 1 and up 2 e To protect the battery pack and keep it in optimal condition do not charge it continuously for more than 24 hours e For battery chargers that use a power cord do not attach the charger or cord to other objects Doing so could result in malfunction or damage to the product Q e For details on charging time and the number of shots and recording time possible with a fully charged bat
59. Playback Mode csssssssssscsnsnssseseeesnnsessseeeennesseeees 103 A E A 103 Touch Screen OperatiONS cccccococnocccnnnccccnononannnnnnnnnnonananos 104 Switching Display ModeS ciciviociicnriviosicin ici 105 Overexposure Warning for Image Highlights 105 o A hats 105 RGB Histogram GPS Information Display 105 Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting Still Images aid lo A o 106 Viewing by an AM Pe e 106 Checking People Detected in Face ID ooccccccccciccconncnoss 107 Browsing and Filtering IMages cccoocccinionccnonionccnnnnnnos 107 Navigating through Images in an IndeX coccccoooccccccccocccnncnnnnn o 107 Touch Screen OperatiONS oooccccccconnnoncccnononononnnnnnnnnnnanons 108 Finding Images Matching Specified Conditions 108 Using the Control Ring to Jump between Images 109 Touch Screen OperatiONS cccccococonoccnonccccononanannnnnnnnononannonns 110 Viewing Individual Images in a Group ccccooonccnccnnnccnnnnnnnonnnnnnnos 110 Editing Face ID Information ccocnoceceneexencndesne mass atroces 111 CHANGING Names icasi ninosnia cta aaa 111 Erasing Names coccion oido eocsastsnueneti eet 111 Image Viewing Options oooccccccconooccnnccnnnnnaconccnnonancconcnnnnos 112 Magnifying Images css ia 112 Touch Screen Oper sin 112 VIEWING SICdESAOWS eiii 112 Auto Playback of Related Images Smart Shuffle
60. Setting Menu Lock the exposure o Aim the camera at the subject to shoot with the exposure locked With the shutter button pressed halfway press the RNG button o is displayed and the exposure is locked Determines the average brightness of light across 9 Accessories the entire image area calculated by treating brightness in the central area as more important 10 Appendix Metering restricted to within the Spot AE Point frame You can also link the Spot AE Point frame to Index the AF frame 0175 o To unlock AE release the shutter button and press the Fe button again In this case HE is no longer displayed 2 Compose the shot and shoot lt gt 5 74 Linking the Spot AE Point Frame to the AF Frame gt gt Still Images Set the metering method to Follow the steps in Changing the RT Metering Method 474 to choose HighISONR Standard Ce Spot AE Point AF Point gt o mal MF Peaking Settings Flash Settings 2 Configure the setting o Press the MENU button choose Spot AE Point on the Y tab and then choose AF Point 130 e The Spot AE Point frame will now be linked to the movement of the AF frame les O Not available when AF Frame is set to Face AiAF H84 Changing the ISO Speed gt gt Still Images P al 1547 FEW 3455 o Turn the ring to choose the ISO speed e The option you config
61. Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 123 Some images may not be corrected accurately To overwrite the original image with the corrected image choose Overwrite in step 4 In this case the original image will be erased Protected images cannot be overwritten e RAW images cannot be edited this way e Red eye correction can be applied to JPEG images shot in q but the original image cannot be overwritten You can save images by touching New File or Overwrite on the screen in step 4 Editing Movies gt Movies You can cut movies to remove unneeded portions at the beginning or end excluding digest movies L136 4 Choose x O Following steps 1 5 in Viewing 12103 choose X and press the button gt a Ld H 4 i gt gt i 200 y a x 8 I ss e The movie editing panel and editing bar are now displayed 1 2 Specify portions to cut o 1 is the movie editing panel and 2 is the editing bar o Press the A W buttons to choose N or 74 eo To view the portions you can cut identified by X on the screen press the 4 buttons or turn the 4B dial to move Cut the beginning of the movie from M by choosing NW and cut the end of the movie by choosing 7 o If you move to a position other than a X mark in YJ the portion before the nearest M4 mark on the left will be cut while in 74 the portion after
62. The Date Time screen is displayed 10 Appendix Index e For guidelines on how many shots or hours of recording can be saved on one memory card see Number of Shots per Memory gt 4 Card 01195 20 oe 2 Set the date and time Changing the Date and Time _ ie ff Set Date Time o Press the 4 buttons to choose an 08 08 2014 10 00 mmyddiyy Hs option Adjust the date and time as follows O Press the a w buttons or turn the 4 7 1 Access the menu screen CHW skip Enon dial to specify the date and time Press the MENU button Ravenced Guide o When finished press the 5 button Camera Basics 2 Choose Date Time y Auto Mode Riis Hybrid Auto Mode o Move the zoom lever to choose the ff tab mare Zoe 3 Specify your home time zone Sound Options o Press the A W buttons or turn the 3 Other Shooting Modes Sto dial to choose Date Time and then ae o Press the 4 buttons to choose your Date Tin 08 08 14 10 00 sel the aoe l 03 08 2014 10 00 home time zone l 4 P Mode n Change the date and time 4 Finish the setup process 7 om N ASS 3 g A E e Follow step 2 in Setting the Date and O o Press the 9 button when finished E ee Time 20 to adjust the settings After a confirmation message the setting D Y s E 6 Playback Mode screen is no longer displayed y o Press the MENU button to close the y e To turn off t
63. Time Zone venu gt To set daylight saving time 1 hour ahead choose Ef by pressing the A W buttons or turning the dial and then choose 6 by pressing the 4 buttons O Press the button 7 2 Switch to the destination time zone O Press the A w buttons or turn the dial to choose X World and then press the MENU button o A is now shown on the shooting screen 179 Select an option Mm Home 08 08 2014 10 00 A World 18 08 2014 11 00 Select Time Zone venu gt e Adjusting the date or time while in FX mode 121 will automatically update your ff Home time and date Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Index O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 152 Lens Retraction Timing The lens is normally retracted for safety about one minute after you press the B button in Shooting mode 11126 To have the lens retracted immediately after you press the button set the retraction timing to O sec O e Choose Lens Retraction and then choose 0 sec Sound Options Hints amp Tips On Date Time 08 08 14 10 00 Time Zone A Retractior Y 0 ye Using Eco Mode This function allows you to conserve battery power in Shooting mode When the camera is not in use the sc
64. Tv P 8 AUTO ND ERAR aka AK E A E E E Ms om m oi a Star Emphasis 66 1167 Sharp Off Soft C M Av Tv P e AUTO OD LR R ASA B S A C a d 2 P pa me Star Portrait Settings A466 Star Visibility Standard Prominent C M Av Tv P 8 AUTO O1 D UL 03 03 89 WR A B W Be IMD 0 3 0 4 2 d 2 1P O Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 9 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index DT 190 Star Time Lapse Movie Setting 1169 Effect PA KA ai ee C M Av Tv P e AUTO O 2 2 02 BB ARa e Se A B C r 2 P R N w Shot Interval 15 sec 30 sec 1 min C M Av Tv P 8 AUTO O10 D L 03 CENA TA E b M om Sn ss SH A 00 8 D 8 D 8 2 4 2 P Frame Rate 15 i30 C M Av Tv P ast AUTO O D L 2 2 RA CAV si GE i B S HDR SE ad 2 0 4 2 d 2 P e a Shooting Time 60 min 90 min 120 min Unlimited C M Av Tv P ast AUTO OY D L 2 2 RA alea R Se AS 5 0 4 2 4 2 P ED O 1 Face ID Settings 44 On Off CM Ay Ty Pi AUTO 9 9 E ram a Set Control Ring Func 1197 C M Av Tv P A AUTO Ol B C R An B 6 ee R S D 0T 4 2 wey B S Set RNG button 99 C M Av Tv P 8 AUTO O1 D LL C3 C3 PB MD B C A 8 E ae ow Set button 199 CM A
65. When transferring RAW images or RAW and JPEG images recorded together to a computer always use the dedicated software 163 e With M or RE the noise reduction level 76 i Contrast L477 and My Colors 180 cannot be configured G e The file extension for JPEG images is JPG and the extension for RAW images is CR2 Other Settings Before Use Basic Guide Changing the Compression Ratio Image Quality gt gt Still Images Advanced Guide Choose from two compression ratios Super Fine and 4 Fine as follows For guidelines on how many shots at each compression ratio can fit on a memory card see Number of Shots per Memory Card 195 o Press the button choose in the menu and choose the desired option 129 Changing the IS Mode Settings gt gt Still Images gt Movies I Settings Access the setting screen o Press the MENU button choose IS l Settings on the tab and then press Detects the scene for the 8 button 130 optimum image stabilization EES 2 Configure the setting o Press the MENU button choose IS Mode on the Y tab and then press the 4 buttons to choose the desired option L130 Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions is automatically applied Intelligent IS 0139 Index Continuous Shoot Only Image stabilization is active only at the moment of shooting Deactivates image stabilization
66. added Download the software e With a computer connected to the Internet access http www canon com icpd o Access the site for your country or region e Download the software Canon DIGITAL CAMERA 2 Begin the installation Click Easy Installation and follow the on screen instructions to complete the installation process 3 When a message is displayed prompting you to connect the camera choose whether to connect or not Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode Wi Fi Functions Index 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 133 When Connecting the Camera to the Computer e With the camera turned off open the cover 1 With the smaller plug of the USB cable in the orientation shown insert the plug fully into the camera terminal 2 O Insert the larger plug of the USB cable in the computer s USB port For details about USB connections on the computer refer to the computer user manual e Turn the camera on and follow the on screen instructions to complete the installation process Without Connecting the Camera o Select Install without connecting the device and follow the on screen instructions to complete the installation process 4 install the files o Installation may take some time depending on computer perf
67. an image i A Canon SELPHY CP series compact photo printer is used here for the 9 Camera Basics sake of illustration Screens displayed and available functions vary by 6 Access the printing screen printer Also refer to the printer manual for additional information 9 eee A nae O Press the button Easy Print gt 7 Print the image 3 Other Shooting Modes gt gt Still Images E pame o Press the A W buttons or turn the 8 Easily print your shots by connecting the camera to a PictBridge Mi Cropping CIAN OO e Ae nt eatin press WE AE compatible printer sold separately with the USB cable pers q button Do a ES e Printing now begins 5 Tv Av M and C Mode Make sure the camera and printer o To print other images repeat the above are off procedures starting from step 5 after 6 Playback Mode printing is finished 2 Connect the camera to the printer e When you are finished printing turn the 7 Wi Fi Functions e Open the terminal cover Holding the camera and printer off and disconnect smaller cable plug in the orientation the cable shown insert the plug fully into the 8 Setting Menu camera terminal A Q e For Canon brand PictBridge compatible printers sold separately f e Connect the larger cable plug to the see Printers 160 9 Accessories printer For other connection details refer e RAW images cannot be printed to the printer manual 10 Appendix Index 3 Turn the printer on lt gt 5
68. and Rec is displayed with the elapsed time 1 Oo Black bars are displayed on the top and bottom edges of the screen and the subject is slightly enlarged The black bars indicate image areas not recorded O Frames displayed around any detected faces indicate that they are in focus e Once recording begins take your finger off the movie button 2 Finish shooting o Press the movie button again to stop shooting The camera beeps twice as recording stops Before Use Advanced Guide Index Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 23 Viewing After shooting images or movies you can view them on the screen as follows Enter Playback mode o Press the gt button Your last shot is displayed 2 Browse through your images o To view the previous image press the 4 button or turn the dial counterclockwise To view the next image press the button or turn the 8 dial clockwise o Press and hold the 4 buttons to browse through images quickly e To access Scroll Display mode turn the dial rapidly In this mode turn the db dial to browse through images e To return to single image display press the 3 button o Movies are identified by a SAD icon To play movies go
69. and the person should stay still in steps 4 5 which may take up to about 8 seconds To make stars brighter choose MENU R430 EY tab gt Star Emphasis Sharp To emphasize the bright stars in a starry sky set Star Emphasis to Soft This setting can produce eye catching shots by enlarging bright stars while de emphasizing dimmer stars To disable starlight processing select Off You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing 25 in steps 1 2 of Specific Scenes L155 touching BINA to access the setting screen touching KB and then touching the same option or Ha Shooting Night Scenes under Starry Skies Star Nightscape gt gt Still Images Capture impressive shots of starry skies above night scenes Starlight in the image is automatically enhanced making starry skies look beautiful Choose KA o Follow steps 1 2 in Specific Scenes Q155 and choose EA and then press the V button O Press the 4 buttons or turn the dB dial to choose W and then press the 9 button Zoom is set to maximum wide angle and cannot be adjusted 2 Secure the camera 0 Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake 3 Shoot e There will be a delay before you can shoot again as the camera processes the images Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mod
70. be edited 1126 Digest Movie Playback Display a still image shot in 4 YE mode to play a digest movie or specify the date of the digest movie to play 1106 Still Images Movies 1 e If the camera is turned on while the V button is held down the camera will no longer sound To activate sounds again press the IMENU button and choose Mute on the ff tab and then press the 4 buttons to choose Off Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Index Camera Basics 92 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 36 Still Images M A blinking 8 icon warns that images are more likely to be blurred by camera shake In this case mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still If your shots are dark despite the flash firing move closer to the subject For details on the flash range see Flash Range 11196 The subject may be too close if the camera only beeps once when you press the shutter button halfway For details on the focusing range shooting range see Shooting Range H196 To reduce red eye and to assist in focusing the lamp may be activated when shooting in low light conditions A blinking icon displayed when you attempt to shoot indicates that shooting is not possible until the flash has finished rech
71. camera on and then turn it off again L119 The battery pack is swollen Battery swelling is normal and does not pose any safety concerns However if battery swelling prevents the battery pack from fitting in the camera contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk Display ona TV Camera images look distorted or not displayed on a TV 4161 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix Index 173 Shooting Cannot shoot e In Playback mode 103 press the shutter button halfway H427 Strange display on the screen under low light 11129 Strange display on the screen when shooting e Note that the following display problems are not recorded in still images but are recorded in movies The screen may flicker and horizontal banding may appear under fluorescent or LED lighting Full screen display is not available while shooting H449 No date stamp is added to images e Although date stamps cannot be added to images with this camera images can be printed with the date as follows Use the software to print For details see Software Instruction Manual 1163 Print using printer functions flashes on the screen when the shutter button is pressed and shooting is not possible L137 O is displayed when th
72. can save images to a computer simply by connecting your camera to the computer without using the software the following limitations apply It may take a few minutes after you connect the camera to the computer until camera images are accessible Images shot in vertical orientation may be saved in horizontal orientation RAW images or JPEG images recorded with RAW images may not be saved Image protection settings may be cleared from images saved to a computer Some problems may occur when saving images or image information depending on the operating system version the software in use or image file sizes Some functions provided by the software may not be available such as movie editing Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 92 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 165 Printing Images 4 Turn the camera on OS o Press the P button to turn the camera gt gt Still Images gt Movies on Basic Guide Your shots can easily be printed by connecting the camera to a printer On the camera you can specify images to set up batch printing prepare 5 Choose an image Advanced Guide orders for photo development services and prepare orders or print op th tt t th images for photobooks ress the 4 buttons or turn the 4 dial to choose
73. choose JPEG in the Safety FE the button H30 menu and choose the desired option a L129 2 Hybrid Auto Mode 2 Configure the setting a y e Choose Shutter Sync and then choose the desired option H30 The flash fires immediately after the shutter opens 4 P Mode a Records JPEG images JPEG images are processed in the camera ESS Immediately berare MI closes for optimal image quality and compressed to reduce file size However the compression process is irreversible and images cannot be restored to their original unprocessed state Image processing may also cause some loss of image quality 6 Playback Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 5 Tv Av M and C Mode Records RAW images RAW images are raw unprocessed data recorded with essentially no loss of image quality from the 7 Wi Fi Functions camera s image processing The data cannot be used in this state for viewing on a computer or printing You must first use the 8 Setting Menu software Digital Photo Professional to convert images to ordinary JPEG or TIFF files Images can be adjusted with minimal loss of image quality 9 Accessories For details on resolution and the number of shots that will fit on a card see Number of Shots per Memory Card 0195 10 Appendix Records two images both a RAW image and a JPEG image for each shot The JPEG image can be viewed on a computer or printed without using the software Index lt gt 5 90 O
74. choose a color tone o A preview is shown of how your shot will look with the effect applied 3 Shoot B W Black and white shots Sepia tone shots Blue and white shots Special Modes for Other Purposes Auto Shooting after Face Detection Smart Shutter _ gt gt Still Images Auto Shooting after Smile Detection gt gt Still Images The camera shoots automatically after detecting a smile even without you pressing the shutter button 4 Choose 17 Follow steps 1 2 in Specific Scenes 1155 and choose gj and then press the V button o Press the 4 buttons or turn the db dial to choose LS and then press the button o The camera now enters shooting standby mode and Smile Detection on is displayed 2 Aim the camera at a person o Each time the camera detects a smile it will shoot after the lamp lights up e To pause smile detection press the 4 button Press the 4 button again to resume detection Switch to another mode when you finish shooting or the camera will continue shooting each time a smile is detected Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes Index 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 63 Q e You can also shoot as usual by pressing the shutter button e The came
75. click the CameraWindow icon in the Dock e To disconnect from the camera turn off the camera If you chose PIN Method in step 6 a PIN code will be displayed on the screen Be sure to set this code in the access point Choose a device in the Select a Device screen For further details refer to the user manual included with your access point Connecting to Listed Access Points Select Network Refresh WPS Connection AccessPoimtl AccessPoint2 Password Entry Enter a password Security WPA2 PSK AES E D Network Settings Auto Manual View the listed access points o View the listed networks access points as described in steps 1 4 of Using WPS Compatible Access Points 00135 2 Choose an access point O Press the a w buttons or turn the dB dial to choose a network access point and then press the 9 button 3 Enter the access point password o Press the button to access the keyboard and then enter the password 1132 O Press the L amp W buttons or turn the dial to choose Next and then press the E button 4 Choose Auto O Press the a w buttons or turn the dial to choose Auto and then press the E button To save images to a connected computer follow the procedure from step 8 in Using WPS Compatible Access Points 00135 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto M
76. consecutively after the last number of existing images on newly inserted memory cards To start saving shots from 0001 use an empty or formatted L11154 memory card e Refer to Software Instruction Manual 111163 for information on the card folder structure and image formats Date Based Image Storage Instead of saving images in folders created each month you can have the camera create folders each day you shoot to store shots taken that day alt Choose Create Folder and then choose LCD Brightness pr 2 Daily AS Images will now be saved in folders Format 7 56B i created on the shooting date File Numbering Continuous Create Folder Daily Metric Non Metric Display Change the unit of measurement shown in the zoom bar 434 the MF indicator 1181 and elsewhere from m cm to ft in as needed a z e Choose Units and then choose ft in Start up Image Format 7 5GB File Numbering Continuous Create Folder Monthly Units tt in Electronic Level Calibration Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineffective in helping you level the camera For greater calibration accuracy display grid lines L199 to help you level the camera in advance Make sure the camera is level O Place the camera on a flat surface such as a table ape 2 Calibrate the electronic level Horizontal Roll Calibration e Choose Electronic Level and then press the button o T
77. continuously in R mode hold it steady while shooting In Pl mode excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions may prevent you from obtaining the desired results In 3 mode mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake Additionally you should set IS Mode to Off when using a tripod or other means to secure the camera L191 When you use a tripod for evening scenes shooting in AUTO mode instead of R2 mode will give better results 134 a In mode although no frames are displayed when you press the shutter button halfway optimal focus is still determined Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes Index 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 56 Using Functions for Underwater Shots Shooting with an Underwater Focusing Range gt gt Still Images If focusing is difficult in Fq mode H455 with a focus range of 4A using a focus range designed for underwater shooting can ensure optimal underwater shots 4 Configure the setting DD Mo MF Underwater Macro o Follow steps 1 2 in Specific Scenes Q155 and choose uk o Press the 4 button choose the desired focus range either press the gt buttons or turn the 4B dial and then press the
78. dial rapidly choose MENU A30 gt P tab gt Index Effect gt Off Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode Index 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 107 Touch Screen Operations opr wah 1 Image Search List Play Digest Movies Smart Shuffle Slideshow e Pinch in to switch from single image display to index display Erase o To view more thumbnails per screen pinch in again o Drag up or down on the screen to scroll through displayed images eo To view fewer thumbnails per screen spread your fingers apart e Touch an image to choose it and touch it again to view it in single image display i 4 um gt Finding Images Matching Specified Conditions 3 gt gt Still Images gt Movies Find desired images quickly on a memory card full of images by filtering image display according to your specified conditions You can also protect 12114 or delete 11116 these images all at once xK Favorites Displays images tagged as favorites 1118 Shot Date Displays the images shot on a specific date Displays images with detected faces Displays still images movies or movies shot in gy mode L136 Ta People Still image Movie L Name Displays images of a registered person L144 Choose
79. edit images and save them as new images 120 0125 a message is displayed and the images that were 2 View images matching your found are no longer shown specified condition or jump by the 8 Setting Menu specified amount 7 Wi Fi Functions o Turn the ring to view only images O Accessories I A igi i e You can also choose conditions by touching the screens in steps matching the condition or jump by the 2 and 3 specified number of images forward or a a back 10 Appendix e After choosing conditions you can view images matching your conditions by touching a condition again Index lt gt 5 109 Touch Screen Operations e You can also jump to the previous or next image according to your jump method chosen in step 1 of Using the Control Ring to Jump between Images 0109 by dragging left or right with two fingers Q e Turning the Eh ring when browsing images in index display will jump to the previous or next image according to the jump method chosen in single image display However if you have chosen Gol or 490 the jump method will be switched to 3 Viewing Individual Images in a Group gt gt Still Images Images shot continuously L143 L187 images shot in M mode 54 and individual still images saved as source data in y mode N69 are grouped and only the first image is displayed However you can also view the images individually 4 Choose a grouped image o Pres
80. fall victim to other types of unauthorized access such as impersonation where someone assumes an identity to gain access to unauthorized information or springboard attacks where someone gains unauthorized access to your network as a springboard to cover their tracks when infiltrating other systems To prevent these types of problems from occurring be sure to thoroughly secure your Wi Fi network Only use this camera s Wi Fi function with a proper understanding of Wi Fi security and balance risk and convenience when adjusting security settings The camera can print to PictBridge compatible printers via Wi Fi PictBridge technical standards make it easy to connect digital cameras printers and other devices directly Additionally a new standard called DPS over IP enables PictBridge connections in network PictBridge environments and the camera is also compatible with USB LAN WLAN this standard YV v Trademarks and Licensing Microsoft and Windows are trademarks or registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and or other countries Macintosh and Mac OS are trademarks of Apple Inc registered in the U S and other countries App Store iPhone and iPad are trademarks of Apple Inc The SDXC logo is a trademark of SD 3C LLC HDMI the HDMI logo and High Definition Multimedia Interface are trademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI Licensing LLC The iFrame logo and the iFrame symbol are trademark
81. g a leakage and or explosion of a battery pack Please note that this warranty does not apply to repairs arising out of the malfunction of non genuine Canon accessories although you may request such repairs on a chargeable basis Optional Accessories The following camera accessories are sold separately Note that availability varies by area and some accessories may no longer be available Power Supplies Battery Pack NB 13L Rechargeable lithium ion battery Battery Charger CB 2LH CB 2LHE e Charger for Battery Pack NB 13L 1 The message Battery communication error is displayed if you use a non genuine Canon battery pack and user response is required Note that Canon shall not be liable for any damages resulting from accidents such as malfunction or fire that occur due to use of non genuine Canon battery packs Q e The battery pack includes a convenient cover which you can attach to know the charge status at a glance Attach the cover so that A is visible on a charged battery pack and attach it so that 4 is not visible on an uncharged battery pack Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 92 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories Index 10 Appendix lt gt 5 159 AC Adapter Kit ACK DC110 o For powering the camera using household power Recommended w
82. memory card e The memory card may be inserted facing the wrong way Reinsert the memory card facing the correct way H419 Memory card locked e The write protect tab of the memory card is set to the locked position Switch the write protect tab to the unlocked position L119 Cannot record e Shooting was attempted without a memory card in the camera To shoot insert a memory card facing the correct way H419 Memory card error 154 e Ifthe same error message is displayed even after you have formatted a supported memory card H42 and have inserted it facing the correct way 1119 contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk Insufficient space on card e There is not enough free space on the memory card to shoot 434 L454 1173 L493 or edit images H4120 Either erase unneeded images 01116 or insert a memory card with enough free space H19 Touch AF unavailable e Touch AF is not available in the current shooting mode 11181 Touch AF canceled e The subject selected for Touch AF can no longer be detected 11186 Charge the battery L119 No Image e The memory card does not contain any images that can be displayed Protected 11114 Unidentified Image Incompatible JPEG Image too large Cannot play back MOV Cannot play back MP4 e Unsupported or corrupt images cannot be displayed e t may not be possible to display images that were edited or renamed on a computer or images shot with another camera C
83. movies recorded in Y mode 1136 cannot be changed Hiding Hints and Tips Hints and tips are normally shown when you choose FUNC L429 or MENU H30 items If you prefer you can deactivate this information Choose Hints amp Tips and then choose Mute Off Volume Sound Options Hints amp Tips Off Date Time 08 08 14 10 00 Time Zone a Date and Time Adjust the date and time as follows e Choose Date Time and then press the 9 button o Press the 4 buttons to choose an option and then adjust the setting either by pressing the 4 buttons or turning the 4 dial Date Time Set Date Time 08 08 2014 10 OO mm dd yy f SET KOLS menu Cance World Clock To ensure that your shots will have the correct local date and time when you travel abroad simply register the destination in advance and switch to that time zone This convenient feature eliminates the need to change the Date Time setting manually Before using the world clock be sure to set the date and time and your home time zone as described in Setting the Date and Time L120 rime Zone Specify your destination Select an option Choose Time Zone and then press the button O Press the a w buttons or turn the dial to choose X World and then press the 9 button o Press the 4 buttons to choose the destination A Home 08 08 2014 10 00 A World Select
84. or sand to enter the camera e On products that raise and lower the flash automatically do not push the flash down or pry it open This may cause the product to malfunction e Wipe off any dust grime or other foreign matter on the flash with a cotton swab or cloth The heat emitted from the flash may cause foreign matter to smoke or the product to malfunction e Remove and store the battery pack batteries when you are not using the product Any battery leakage that occurs may cause product damage e Before you discard the battery pack batteries cover the terminals with tape or other insulators Contacting other metal materials may lead to fire or explosions e Unplug any battery charger used with the product when not in use Do not cover with a cloth or other objects when in use Leaving the unit plugged in for a long period of time may cause it to overheat and distort resulting in fire e Do not leave any dedicated battery packs near pets Pets biting the battery pack could cause leakage overheating or explosion resulting in product damage or fire Advanced Guide Index 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 16 e lf your product uses multiple batteries do not use batteries that have different levels of charge together and do not use old and ne
85. printing H4171 and ordering prints from a photo development service can be set up on the camera Choose up to 998 images on a memory card and configure relevant settings such as the number of copies as follows The printing information you prepare this way will conform to DPOF Digital Print Order Format standards Q e RAW images cannot be included in print list Configuring Print Settings gt Still Images Specify the printing format whether to add the date or file number and other settings as follows These settings apply to all images in the print list o Press the MENU button and then choose Print Settings on the D tab Choose and configure items as desired 1130 Print Settings Print Type Standard Date Off File No Off Clear DPOF data On Qu Standard One image is printed per sheet a On File No OOo Je oO On All image print list settings are cleared after Clear DPOF printing NN data Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 92 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 169 2 14 m NN 3 Specify the number of prints Bef O Not all of your DPOF settings may be applied in printing by the a d 01 DES printer or photo development service in some cases e Press the a w buttons or turn the may
86. referred to as the memory card The symbols gt Still Images and P gt Movies below titles indicate how the function is used whether for still images or movies Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Index Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 Table of Contents Before Use NiMal IOMA ON tinas 2 Package Contents sn rene 2 Compatible Memory CardS oocccccccoonnoccnocccononoccnccnnonanccononons 2 Preliminary Notes and Legal Information occcccccooomm 3 Part Names and Conventions in This Guide oooccncccc o 4 Common Camera Operations ccccoocccccccoccnccconnnnnccononnnnnnnnnns 13 Safety PRECAUTIONS criando 15 Basic Guide Basic CPST o A cetaceans eicueteetateewsuecdene 18 inital PEDO Sins 18 Attaching the Strap sisi cia dad 18 Holding the Camerino iris ie 18 Charging the Battery Pack oocccoooccnoccconcccccnccnannncnanononannnns 19 Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory CalTd occcooccncccccccccnnnn 19 Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card 20 Setting the Date and Time ooonccccccconcncccconoconoccnononnnnnnnnnnnnnnos 20 Changing the Date and TiMe oocccccccoccccnccconcncnnncnannnnncnnos 21 Display Langquade voces satstwtdinecactitensinama
87. select this option A Y icon is displayed Follow steps 2 3 in Formatting Memory Cards 11154 to continue with the formatting process Format Format memory card Y Low Level Format Cancel OK Q e Low level formatting takes longer than Formatting Memory Cards 1154 because data is erased from all storage regions of the memory card e You can cancel low level formatting in progress by choosing Stop In this case all data will be erased but the memory card can be used normally Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 92 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Index O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 154 File Numbering Your shots are automatically numbered in sequential order 0001 9999 and saved in folders that store up to 2 000 images each You can change how the camera assigns file numbers O e Choose File Numbering and then i choose an option Power Saving LCD Brightness en e Start up Image Format File Numberir Images are numbered consecutively until the 9999th Continuous shot is taken saved even if you switch memory cards Image numbering is reset to 0001 if you switch memory cards or when a new folder is created Auto Reset G e Regardless of the option selected in this setting shots may be numbered
88. should stay still until the lamp blinks three times after the third shot which may take up to about two seconds o All the shots are combined to create a single image Under some shooting conditions images may not look as expected For better shots have the person stand away from illumination such as street lights and make sure the flash is raised There will be a delay before you can shoot again as the camera processes the images To avoid blurry shots make sure the person you shoot in steps 4 5 stays still Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes Index 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 66 For easier viewing try choosing MENU e tab gt Night Display gt On L192 before shooting To adjust subject brightness try changing the flash exposure compensation 489 To adjust background brightness try changing the exposure compensation L174 However images may not look as expected under some shooting conditions and the person should stay still in steps 4 5 which may take up to about 15 seconds To capture more stars and brighter starlight choose MENU L130 gt OY tab gt Star Portrait Settings gt Star Visibility gt Prominent However images may not look as expected under some shooting conditions
89. speed H93 194 28 Image quality Frame rate printer LH e Aperture value L194 94 movies 49 150 Displays the frame approx 4 sec before or after the current frame 29 Group playback 111110 e During movie playback you can skip back or forward or to the previous or next clip by pressing the P buttons lt gt 5 180 Functions and Menu Tables y Before Use C M Av Tv P lt AUTO Ds C2 e PR ws E gt i 18 4 18 1 2 y 2 ANP Basic Guid Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode Hy oS HB HORE D S OA A aP GE Available or automatically set functions are indicated by black icons such as 42 Unavailable functions are indicated by gray icons such as C C M Av Tv P de I AUTO O D LIC A Exposure Compensation 474 PAY s c Be EE MR 9 3 0 4 2 Ud Camera Basics 3 P A In es C M Av Tv P S AUTO OR E83 82 BB Auto Mode A a bc TE I RE Mo a a e 2 Hybrid Auto Mode MZ C M Av Tv P 8 AUTO O1 D L Vea aE RD ool a O ER Y m C M Av Tv P E AUTO 0D EAA R Flash Exposure Compensation 489 4 P Mode V V A 7 al Co x r ed a eR ol ea ET C M Av Tv P 8 AUTO O0 D LL 3 03 89 R 3 Other Shooting Modes w t CA PED cB 8 OVAS EE AP AGAS ha E Al E kadkad i CIM Av T IP AUTO ODIA Flash Output Level 195 6 Playback Mode vilv A 1 L A gt AER OIE MIN ICN J C M Av Tv P gt AUTO Ou RI C31 C2 R 7 Wi Fi Functions w e
90. the 4B dial and then press the 6 button o f less than five items of face info are registered go to step 4 to add face information 3 Choose the face info to overwrite O Press the a W 4 buttons or turn the 4B dial to choose the face info to Select face info to overwrite ETK 5 4 Register face information O Follow step 2 in Registering Face ID Information 0144 to shoot and then register the new face information Add to Registry Keep the face within the frame then shoot Registered faces are more easily recognized if you add a variety of face information In addition to a head on angle add a slight side angle a shot when smiling and shots inside and outside GY e You cannot add face information if all 5 information slots are filled Follow the steps above to overwrite face information e You can follow the above steps to register new face info when there is at least one slot open however you cannot overwrite any face information Instead of overwriting face info first erase unwanted existing info 12146 and then register new face information H444 as needed overwrite and then press the 9 button Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Index Camera Basics 92 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5
91. the Se an image to send and then press the smartphone user manual 6 Playback Mode button Y is displayed e On the screen wireless signal strength is indicated by the following j 1 pad o To cancel selection press the 69 button icons Kal e again V is no longer displayed Yul high fil medium Y low Y weak Repeat this process to choose additional e Sending images to Web services will take less time when resending 8 Setting Menu images images you have already sent that are still on the CANON iMAGE e Cai GATEWAY server o After you finish choosing images press 9 Accessories the MENU button lt 3 Send the images 10 Appendix o Press the gt buttons or turn the di dial to choose Send and then press the Index button e You can also choose images in step 2 by moving the zoom lever twice toward QJ to access single image display and then pressing the P buttons or turning the dial gt 4 144 Choosing the Image Resolution Size On the image transfer screen choose t4 by pressing the a W buttons and then press the 9 button On the screen displayed choose the resolution by pressing the 4 buttons and then press the button e To send images at original size select No as the resizing option e Choosing M2 or S will resize images that are larger than the selected size before sending e Movies cannot be resized G Image size can also be co
92. the correction level for B and A and then press the 9 button Once the setting is complete 88 is displayed G e B represents blue and A amber e Skin tones remain the same when you adjust colors in ts mode e Advanced settings can be accessed by pressing the MENU button when the screen in step 2 is displayed L179 e You can also choose the correction level by touching or dragging the bar in step 2 e Advanced settings can be accessed by touching AMANU when the screen in step 2 is displayed L179 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes Index 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 70 Shooting Various Movies gt gt Movies Shooting Movies in Standard Mode gt gt Movies Enter P mode O Set the mode dial to WN o Press the 9 button choose PM in the menu and then choose P 1129 O Black bars are displayed on the top and bottom edges of the screen and the subject is slightly enlarged The black bars indicate image areas not recorded 2 Configure the settings to suit the movie 111181 3 Shoot o Press the movie button o To stop movie recording press the movie button again Nl XY You can lock the focus during recording by touching AFI MF is then displayed Locking or
93. the main subject and gray frames are displayed around other detected faces Frames follow moving subjects within a certain range to keep them in focus However if the camera detects subject movement only the white frame will remain on the screen e When you are pressing the shutter button halfway and the camera detects subject movement a blue frame is displayed and the focus and image brightness are constantly adjusted Servo AF 1 Try shooting in P mode 1173 if no frames are displayed if frames are not displayed around desired subjects or if frames are displayed on the background or similar areas e To choose subjects to focus on touch the desired subject on the screen L J is displayed and the camera enters Touch AF mode Pressing the shutter button halfway will display a blue AF frame and the camera will keep the subject in focus and image brightness adjusted Servo AF Common Convenient Features Zooming In Closer on Subjects Digital Zoom gt gt Still Images gt Movies When distant subjects are too far away to enlarge using the optical zoom use digital zoom for up to about 17x enlargement Move the zoom lever toward C8 o Hold the lever until Zooming stops e Zooming stops at the largest possible zoom factor before the image becomes noticeably grainy which is then indicated on the screen 1 2 Move the zoom lever toward 4 again o The camera zooms in even closer on the
94. the nearest X mark on the right will be cut Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode Index 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 124 3 Review the edited movie O Press the a w buttons to choose P and then press the button The edited movie is now played e To edit the movie again repeat step 2 o To cancel editing press the MENU button choose OK either press the 4 buttons or turn the dB dial and then press the button E 4 Save the edited movie pe 20 yo gt O Press the a w buttons to choose Y a x and then press the 9 button ee Cancel Compress amp Sav Cancel o Press the amp 4 gt buttons or turn Sanne the dial to choose New File and then press the button ven gt e Choose Save w o Comp and then press the button A x e The movie is now saved as a new file TTD ll omg To overwrite the original movie with the cut one choose Overwrite in step 4 In this case the original movie will be erased If the memory card lacks sufficient space only Overwrite will be available Movies may not be saved if the battery pack runs out while saving is in progress When editing movies you should use a fully charged battery pa
95. the setting screen touching C33 and then touching the same option or K Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 65 Shooting Starry Skies Star Shooting People against Starry Skies Star Portrait gt gt Still Images Capture beautiful shots of people against starry skies After initially firing the flash to capture the person the camera shoots twice without flash The three images are combined into a single image and processed to make the stars more prominent For details on the flash range see Flash Range L1196 4 Choose 3 o Follow steps 1 2 in Specific Scenes L155 and choose EA and then press the V button o Press the 4 buttons or turn the 4h dial to choose W and then press the 9 button Zoom is set to maximum wide angle and cannot be adjusted 2 Raise the flash o Move the switch 3 Secure the camera 0 Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still 4 Shoot o Press the shutter button The flash fires as the camera takes the first shot e The second and third shots are now taken without firing the flash 5 Have the person stay still until the lamp blinks o The person you are shooting
96. to step 3 3 Play movies o Press the button to access the movie control panel choose P either press the 4 buttons or turn the dB dial and then press the button again o Playback now begins and after the movie is finished R gt is displayed e To adjust the volume 1 press the a w buttons Q e To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode press the shutter button halfway Touch Screen Operations o To view the next image drag left across the screen in step 2 and to view the previous image drag right e To access Scroll Display mode quickly drag left or right repeatedly e To return to single image display from Scroll Display mode touch the image in the middle of the screen e Choose a movie and touch 6 gt to start playback e To adjust the volume during movie playback quickly drag up or down across the screen Before Use Advanced Guide Index Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 24 Erasing Images You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one Be careful when erasing images because they cannot be recovered 4 Choose an image to erase o Press the 4 buttons or turn the dB dial to choose an image 2 Erase the image o Press the 1 button o After Erase i
97. turn the 4 dial to choose an item to edit and then press the button o The items you can change depend on what device or service the camera will access Connection Web Services Configurable Items Change Device Nickname i149 o o fo o Mew Settings Q130 fo Erase Connection Info i149 o o fo fo O Configurable Not configurable Changing a Device Nickname You can change the device nickname display name that is displayed on the camera Following step 4 in Editing Connection Information 149 choose Change Device Nickname and press the button o Select the input field and press the 65 button Use the keyboard displayed to enter a new nickname 1132 Windows Change Device Nickname Erase Connection Info Erasing Connection Information Erase connection information information about devices that you have connected to as follows Following step 4 in Editing Connection Information 11149 choose Erase Windows Connection Info and press the Erase button Erase Connection Info o After Erase is displayed press the 4 buttons or turn the 4H dial to choose OK and then press the Gs button Cancel e The connection information will be erased Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av
98. up o If you insert the battery pack facing the wrong way it cannot be locked into the correct position Always confirm that the battery pack is facing the right way and locks when inserted Camera Basics Auto M Remove the memory card 2 Hybrid AE Mode 3 Check the card s write protect tab and insert the memory card o Push the memory card in until it clicks and then slowly release it 3 Other Shooting Modes Recording is not possible on memory e The memory card will pop up cards with a write protect tab when the tab is in the locked position Slide the tab to the unlocked position a l l o Insert the memory card with the label 1 Setting the Date and Time facing as shown until it clicks into place 6 Playback Mode Set the current date and time correctly as follows if the Date Time screen is displayed when you turn the camera on Information you specify this way is recorded in image properties when you shoot and it is used when 7 Wi Fi Functions you manage images by shooting date or print images showing the date 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode O Make sure the memory card is facing the right way when you insert it Inserting memory cards facing the wrong way may damage the camera 8 Setting M etting Menu 4 Close the cover Turn the camera on e Lower the cover 1 and hold it down as o Press the power button you slide the switch until it clicks into the closed position 2 Q Accessories o
99. w buttons or turn the dh dial to choose Start and then press the 9 button o The slideshow will start after Loading image is displayed for a few seconds Before Use Basic Guide e Your chosen image is displayed in the center surrounded by the next four Ravancediculde candidate images o Press the MENU button to stop the o For full screen display of the center z Ea slideshow image press the button To restore L Camano the original display press the 6 button again 2 Auto Mode 1 The camera s power saving functions L127 are deactivated gain Hybrid Auto Mode during slideshows o Press the MENU button to restore single image display 3 Other Shooting Modes G To pause or resume slideshows press the button O Smart Shuffle is not available in the following cases 4 P Mode e You can switch to other images during playback by pressing the There are less than 50 shots taken with this camera E E An unsupported image is currently displayed KIP buttons or turning the MB dial For fast forward or fast rewind hold the gt buttons down Images are shown in filtered display 108 9 Tv Av M and C Mode During group playback 4110 6 Playback Mode Nl XD e You can also stop slideshows by touching the screen Ni ae i E e On the screen in step 2 touching an image above below or on 7 Wi Fi Functions either side will show your chosen image in the center surrounded by the next four cand
100. with liquid and do not allow liquid or foreign objects inside This could result in electrical shock or fire If the product gets wet or if liquid or foreign objects get inside remove the battery pack batteries or unplug immediately e Do not look through the viewfinder if your model has one at intense light sources such as the sun on a clear day or an intense artificial light source This could damage your eyesight e Do not touch the product during thunderstorms if it is plugged in This could result in electrical shock or fire Immediately stop using the product and distance yourself from it e Use only the recommended battery pack batteries e Do not place the battery pack batteries near or in direct flame This may cause the battery pack batteries to explode or leak resulting in electrical shock fire or injuries If leaking battery electrolyte comes into contact with eyes mouth skin or clothing immediately flush with water e lf the product uses a battery charger note the following precautions Remove the plug periodically and using a dry cloth wipe away any dust and dirt that has collected on the plug the exterior of the power outlet and the surrounding area Do not insert or remove the plug with wet hands Do not use the equipment in a manner that exceeds the rated capacity of the electrical outlet or wiring accessories Do not use if the plug is damaged or not fully inserted in the outlet Do not all
101. www canon com cig Cancel Authenticate A 6 Establish a connection with an Refresh access point WPS Connection AccessPoint Connect to the access point as described AccessPoint2 in steps 5 7 in Using WPS Compatible Access Points 11135 or in steps 2 4 in Connecting to Listed Access Points 137 e Once the camera is connected to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY via the access point an authentication code is displayed Camera Web Link Settings Enter the below authentication code into the text field on the browser and select OK XX XXXXX XXXXX 7 Enter the authentication code e On the smartphone or computer enter the authentication code displayed on the camera and go to the next step o A six digit confirmation number is displayed Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode Wi Fi Functions Index 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 139 4 amera Web Link Settings 8 Check the confirmation numbers Select OK if the confirmation and complete the setup process number on the browser matches the number below eo Make sure the confirmation number on XXXXXX the camera matches the number on the smartphone or computer o Press the 4 buttons or turn the dB dial to choose OK and then press the 9 button Com
102. you press the shutter button halfway press the button For full screen display in this state choose an image by pressing the aA W 4 buttons or turning the 4 dial and then press the Ga button To return to the original display press the IMENU button Shooting will take some time when the flash fires but hold the camera steady until the shutter sound is played three times The six images are managed together as a group H4110 Simultaneous display of the six images as shown in step 2 is only available immediately after you shoot Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes Index 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix 54 Choosing Effects gt gt Still Images You can choose effects for images captured in DJ mode o After choosing M mode turn the ring to choose the effect orea aL 25 AED 3455 Oni N Auto CR Retro Ni Monochrome C Special Natural Specific Scenes Before Use Choose a mode matching the shooting scene and the camera will Basic Guide automatically configure the settings for optimal shots Y Enter SCN mode o Set the mode dial to SCN 2 Choose a shooting mode o Press the button choose WM in the menu and then choose a shooting mode 129 3 Shoot Y Shooti
103. you can assign Changing Control Ring Settings to the control dial Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics gt gt Still Images P Movies Reassign control ring functions as follows Using the control ring is an enjoyable way to control the camera as you would a fully manual camera Choose a function to assign to the 2 Teg hae Mode E ring o Press the PNS button 3 Other Shooting Modes P Mode TAERE Choose an option either by pressing the Focus manually 1181 4 Pree pa RNG or 4 buttons or by turning the Correct white balance MA U i 179 P See o Press the button to complete the Perform step zooming MH41 io A A A 2 Configure the assigned function Turn the ring or the dB dial to 8 setting Menu configure the assigned function e ISO ISO speed H75 MF manual focus H481 Tv shutter O Accessories speed L193 Av aperture value 1194 N E e When you assign W8 ZOOM Q or to the Z ring X You can also configure this setting by pressing the E button the AA Ae vo MF bal ZOOM apt citar are reto tt el D IR 10 Appendix touching an option to choose it and then touching it again G e Icons labeled with Q indicate that the function is not available in tales the current shooting mode or under current function conditions e The E ring can be used for step zooming in AUTO SCN or movie mode H441 e In Mi mode you
104. 0196 4 Configure the setting O Press the a button choose H either press the 4 buttons or turn the 8 dial and then press the 69 button o Once the setting is complete HI is displayed 2 Shoot o Hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot continuously 1 During continuous shooting focus and exposure are locked at the position level determined when you pressed the shutter button halfway Cannot be used with the self timer R441 e Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow down depending on shooting conditions camera settings and the zoom position e Asmore shots are taken shooting may slow down e Shooting may slow down if the flash fires e Multi area White Balance L134 is not available Similarly Hg Lamp Corr 49 is set to Off and cannot be changed With Touch Shutter L142 the camera shoots continuously while you touch the screen Focus and exposure during continuous shooting remain constant after they are determined for the first shot Image Display during Playback Each set of images shot continuously is managed as a single group and only the first image in that group will be displayed To indicate that the image is part of a group G39 21 is displayed in the upper left of the screen O e If you erase a grouped image H4116 all images in the group are also erased Be careful when erasing images G Grouped images can be played back ind
105. 103 Viewing Slideshows 11112 Protecting Images 11114 Erasing Images 12116 Adding Images to the Print List DPOF 1169 Adding Images to a Photobook 2 1171 4 Choose Favorites cia o Press the MENU button and choose Erase o Favorites on the tab 430 Rotate 2 Choose an image o Press the 4 buttons or turn the db dial to choose an image and then press the 69 button 4 is displayed o To untag the image press the 49 button Ep B ox again xk is no longer displayed Repeat this process to choose additional images a 3 Finish the setup process o Press the MENU button A confirmation message is displayed o Press the 4 buttons or turn the dB dial to choose OK and then press the 9 button Accept changes Stop Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode Index 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 118 Images will not be tagged as favorites if you switch to Shooting mode or turn the camera off before finishing the setup process in step 3 Favorite images will have a three star rating KKK when transferred to computers running Windows 8 or Windows 7 Does not apply to movies or RAW images You can also select or clear current im
106. 152 Wrist strap Strap Z Zoom 22 34 40 41 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 200 Wi Fi Wireless LAN Precautions e Countries and Regions Permitting WLAN Use Use of WLAN is restricted in some countries and regions and illegal use may be punishable under national or local regulations To avoid violating WLAN regulations visit the Canon website to check where use is allowed Note that Canon cannot be held liable for any problems arising from use in other countries and regions e Doing any of the following may incur legal penalties Altering or modifying the product Removing the certification labels from the product e According to foreign exchange and foreign trade law regulations export permission or service transaction permission from the Japanese government is necessary to export strategic resources or services including this product outside Japan e Because this product includes American encryption software it falls under U S Export Administration Regulations and cannot be exported to or brought into a country under U S trade embargo e Be sure to make notes of the wireless LAN settings you use The wireless LAN settings saved to this product may change or be erased due to incorrect ope
107. 4 Using the Face Self Timer cccccccsssssseeeeeeeeeseeeesseeeeeeeeees 65 Shooting Starry Skies Star avion 66 Shooting People against Starry Skies Star Portrait 66 Shooting Night Scenes under Starry Skies Star Nightscape nucionecicana sac sita cd 67 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Index Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 Shooting Star Trails Star Trails ccccccccesssssssseeeeeeeeees 68 Shooting Movies of Star Movement Star Time Lapse Movie cccccccecssssseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeseeeeeaes 69 Adjusting Colors Sscscrccduace teaspieoiooctanxsaniatexcnosedunseacimseiientsaieane 70 Shooting Various MOVIES ccccccssssseeeeeceeeesseeeeseeeesseeeeeens 71 Shooting Movies in Standard MOde scsceeeeeeeceeeessseeeees 71 Locking or Changing Image Brightness before Shooting 71 Shooting iFrame MOVIES ccoo ia ida 72 P MOUE eae a aa r tenses 73 Shooting in Program AE P Mode ccccccccoooccnccccconooccnnoo La Image Brightness EXPOSUFE cccccoooncccccccoocooconcccnonancconcnnnnnnos 74 Adjusting Image Brightness Exposure Compensation 74 Locking Image Brightness Exposure AE Lock 74 Changing the Metering Method occccccooccncc
108. 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 116 3 Erase the image o Press the MENU button A confirmation message is displayed o Press the 4 buttons or turn the dB dial to choose OK and then press the 9 button tam gt Selecting a Range 4 Choose Select Range o Following step 2 in Choosing a Selection Method 4116 choose Select Range and press the button 2 Choose images O Follow steps 2 3 in Selecting a Range R1115 to specify images 3 Erase the images o Press the V button to choose Erase and then press the 5 button Select Range 3 images Specifying All Images at Once Choose Select All Images o Following step 2 in Choosing a Selection Method 116 choose Select All Images and press the 6 button 2 Erase the images o Press the 4 buttons or turn the dB dial to choose OK and then press the 9 button Erase all images Cancel Rotating Images gt Still Images Change the orientation of images and save them as follows CEE Choose Rotate A o Press the MENU button and choose Erase Rotate on the D tab 1130 Protect 2 Rotate the image o Press the 4 buttons or turn the db dial to choose an image e The image is rotated 90 each time you press the button
109. 7 from step 2 Sending Images to a Registered Web Service Before Use Basic Guide Registering Web Services Advanced Guide Use a smartphone or computer to add to the camera Web services that you want to use o Camera Basics e Asmartphone or computer with a browser and Internet connection is required to complete camera settings for CANON MAGE GATEWAY and other Web services e Check the CANON MAGE GATEWAY website for details on browser 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode Microsoft Internet Explorer etc requirements including settings and 3 Other Shooting Modes version information e For information on countries and regions where CANON MAGE 4 P Mode GATEWAY is available visit the Canon website http www canon com cig 5 Tv Av M and C Mode e You must have an account with Web services other than CANON iMAGE GATEWAY if you desire to use them For further details check the websites for each Web service you want to register e Separate ISP connection and access point fees may be applicable 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 6 Playback Mode O Accessories 10 Appendix Index lt gt 5 138 Registering CANON MAGE GATEWAY After linking the camera and CANON MAGE GATEWAY add CANON MAGE GATEWAY as a destination Web service on the camera 7 L q Log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY and access the camera web link settings page o From a computer or smartphone access http www cano
110. 82 7 White balance 178 Mercury lamp correction 0149 8 My Colors 80 19 Focusing range 481 1181 4 gt AF lock 1187 4 9 Eco mode 153 17 Remaining time 196 18 Histogram 4105 179 30 Compression image quality 31 Still images Resolution 195 Playback Detailed Information Display Before Use R91 Resolution 149 Movies Playback time 01196 1150 Digest movies le si nee SET om 1 236 RAW R290 MP4 32 File size Basic Guide 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 metes 22 Tl 11L bx f 100 0002 08 08 2014 A ay 6 P 1 125 F4 0 0 DP NR Rw Fim Movies 434 1103 Current image no Total no of images Histogram R4105 Battery level L179 Exposure compensation level 174 200 CE MBA Ay Y ND ED AL 5472x3648 2 26MB P 17 12 13 14 15 16 1 125 F4 0 0 200 18 19 20 21 22 23 E WA Ay Y ND 24 26 28 30 31 82 PNR Eo Gin cl AL 5472x3648 2 26MB 25 27 29 16 17 18 19 ISO speed H475 Metering method 1174 Flash L188 Flash exposure compensation L189 White balance 1178 e Some information may not be displayed when viewing images on a TV 1161 Summary of Movie Control Panel The following operations are available on the movie control panel accessed as described in Viewing H103 A Touch to displa
111. Appendix lt gt 5 146 Q e Even if images were imported to the computer through a different Using a Smartphone to View Camera Before Use method any images not sent to the computer via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY will be sent to the computer e Sending is faster when the destination is a computer on the same network as the camera because images are sent via the access You can do the following with the dedicated smartphone app Ad d Guid q CameraWindow vance Nl Neh point instead of CANON iMAGE GATEWAY Note that images Images and Control the Camera Basic Guide stored on the computer are sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY so e Browse images on the camera and save them to the smartphone the computer must be connected to the Internet Geotag images on the camera A147 Camera Basics e Shoot remotely 1148 y Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 1 In camera settings the smartphone must be allowed to view camera images 11128 11130 1149 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode Geotagging Images on the Camera 5 Tv Av M and C Mode GPS data recorded on a smartphone using the dedicated CameraWindow application can be added to images on the camera Images are tagged with information including the latitude longitude and elevation 1 Before shooting make sure the date and time and your home 7 Wi Fi Functions time zone are set correctly as described in Setting the Date and Time 1120 Also follow the steps in World Cl
112. Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 46 Even if you change names in Edit Profile the names recorded in previously shot images will remain the same Q e You can use the software 4163 to edit registered names Some characters entered with the software may not display on the camera but will be correctly recorded in images Overwriting and Adding Face Information You can overwrite existing face information with new face info You should update face information regularly especially with babies and children as their faces change quickly as they grow You can also add face information when all 5 face info slots have not been filled 4 Access the Add Face Info screen Add to Registry Add a New Face Add Face Info O Following step 1 in Registering Face ID Information 1144 choose Add Face Info and press the button Add more angles or expressions for improved recognition Mun gt 2 Choose the name of the person to UF overwrite e AR Maria o Press the a W 4 buttons or turn Dome en the 4 dial to choose the name of a person whose face info you want to overwrite and then press the button ser Ox N gt o If five items of face info have already been registered a message will be displayed Choose OK either press the 4 buttons or turn
113. Before Use Rated Input 100 240 V AC 50 60 Hz AUTO mode 0 09 A 100 V 0 06 A 240 V Basic Guide automatically set 1 1 2000 sec Rated Output 42VDC 07A ae Charging Time Approx 2 hr 10 min when using NB 13L 250 200 160 125 100 80 60 50 40 30 25 Charge Indicator Charging orange Fully charged green two 20 15 13 10 8 6 5 4 3 2 2 5 2 1 6 1 3 1 indicator system a Available values in 0 8 0 6 0 5 0 4 0 3 1 4 1 5 1 6 1 8 1 10 Operating Temperatures 5 40 C 41 104 F 1 Camera Basics Tv MI or Pe 1 13 1 15 1 20 1 25 1 30 1 40 1 50 1 60 mode sec 2 1 80 1 100 1 125 1 160 1 200 1 250 1 320 2 T Lee 1 400 1 500 1 640 1 800 1 1000 1 1250 oe 3 Other Shooting Modes 1 In Ty mode shutter speeds of 20 seconds or slower are not available 2 In Pl mode shutter speeds of 1 25 seconds or slower are not available A P Mode Aperture p 5 Tv Av M and C Mode f 1 8 f 11 W 1 2 8 1 11 T Availabl i 6 Playback Mode i AVi Mi or Pal f 1 8 1 2 0 1 2 2 1 2 5 112 8 113 2 113 5 1 4 0 d _ dl f 4 5 f 5 0 f 5 6 f 6 3 f 7 1 f 8 0 f 9 0 f 10 1 11 En mode 7 Wi Fi Functions Depending on the zoom position some aperture values may not be available 8 Setting Menu Battery Pack NB 13L Type Rechargeable lithium ion battery a SES Nominal Voltage 3 6 V DC Nominal Capacity 1250 mAh Charging Cycles Approx 300 times Operating Temperatu
114. Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 92 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index lt gt 188 Spot AE Point 11174 Center C M Av Tv P cs AUTO OW D L BB BA BA P E 6 ee ADR 0 5 00 4 2 d 2 P Pam ON AF Point C M Av Tv P e AUTO ON D 2 2 R A A BIO B S AR S d 8 0 A 2 igs E el Safety Shift 194 On CM AV Ty P lcs AUTO OM D O 2 0 R AI 8 a SS ADR 9 op 3 00 4 Y re o o Off C M Av Tv P cst O O Cs eB HRI GD yO BS QI E all Wind Filter 437 Auto Off C M Av Tv P AUTO OD 0 03 82 R A IE nE 5 0 GIAN E ON Review image after shooting R452 Display Time Off Quick C M Av Tv P e AUTO OD EaR GA E E MORR No 8 I My om SL 2 sec 4 sec 8 sec C M Av Tv P 8 AUTO O0 D L 3 3 89 M a E R O BO A r E w e Hold C M Av Tv P a AUTO dl A B W S 2 HDR 9 0 3 0 24 2 1d 2 P E N a Display Info Off C M Av Tv P a AUTO LE Ca B A A a BIE M 80 D 8 00 4 T e A ED oY os Detailed C M Av Tv P e Se ee AID M8 D 3 0 4 2 14 2 P La Blink Detection 1151 On C M Av Tv P a AUTO OI DL ICI ASF IB 418 M 90 0 3 0 4 2 4 2P A i a Off C M Av T
115. C PAL Digital Tele Converter 2 0x 48 0 200 0 mm Battery Pack NB 13L 8 Setting Menu Power Source ac Adapter Kit ACK DC110 Dimensions 9 Accessories Based on CIPA 103 0 x 60 4 x 40 4 mm 4 06 x 2 38 x 1 59 in oe a Appendix Weight Based on Approx 304 g approx 10 72 oz including the oe battery pack and memory card ee Approx 279 g approx 9 84 oz camera body only Index Data Type 5 Tv Av M and C Mode lt gt 5 194 Number of Shots Recording Time Playback Time Number of Shots Approx 210 Number of Shots Eco Mode On Approx 310 Movie Recording Time Approx 40 minutes Movie Recording Time Continuous Shooting Approx 1 hour 10 minutes Playback Time Approx 4 hours 4 Time under default camera settings when normal operations are performed such as shooting pausing turning the camera on and off and zooming 2 Time available when shooting the maximum movie length until recording stops automatically repeatedly e The number of shots that can be taken is based on measurement guidelines of the Camera amp Imaging Products Association CIPA e Under some shooting conditions the number of shots and recording time may be less than mentioned above e Number of shots time with a fully charged battery pack Number of Shots per Memory Card The number of shots at an aspect ratio 11148 of 3 2 per memory card is as follows Note that the number of shots available varies by asp
116. Canon PowerShot G7 X Camera User Guide e Make sure you read this guide including the Safety Precautions Q115 section before using the camera e Reading this guide will help you learn to use the camera properly e Store this guide safely so that you can use it in the future Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode e Click the buttons in the lower right to access other pages B Next page 7 Wi Fi Functions Previous page Y Page before you clicked a link 8 Setting Menu e To jump to the beginning of a chapter click the chapter title at right Q Accessories 10 Appendix ENGLISH CANON INC 2014 CDD E596 010 Compatible Memory Cards B efo re U S The following memory cards sold separately can be used regardless of Basic Guide capacity e SD memory cards Advanced Guide e SDHC memory cards n itial nfo rmat i O n e SDXC memory cards Camera Basics 22 2 Auto Mode Package Contents Hybrid Auto Mode 4 Cards conforming to SD standards However not all memory cards have been ee verified to work with the camera Before use make sure the following items are included in the package 157 JUAS Linemonrcatdsar also supported 3 Other Shooting Modes If anything is missing contact your camera retailer 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C M
117. Changing Image Brightness before Shooting Before Use B Movies You can lock the exposure before or during recording or adjust it in 1 3 stop increments within a range of 3 to 3 stops Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics MIR 2 AL 1547 AED 1733 Lock the exposure e Touch to lock the exposure e To unlock the exposure touch 3 again 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 2 Adjust the exposure e Touch on the screen 4 P Mode e Touch 4 to adjust the exposure 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 3 Shoot L1171 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions O e The exposure compensation dial cannot be used 8 Setting Menu Q e You can also adjust the exposure by turning the E ring before recording 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index lt gt 5 71 Shooting iFrame Movies B gt Movies Shoot movies that can be edited with iFrame compatible software or devices You can quickly edit save and manage your iFrame movies using the software 4163 4 Choose o Set the mode dial to PS O Press the 9 button choose PB in the menu and then choose m L129 O Black bars displayed on the top and bottom edges of the screen indicate image areas not recorded 2 Shoot 11171 Q e iFrame is a video format developed by Apple Inc e The resolution is typ EQ 150 and cannot be changed Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Au
118. Connection failed e No access points were recognized Check the access point settings H4135 e A device could not be found Turn the camera off and on again and retry the connection e Check the device you want to connect to and make sure it is ready for connection Cannot determine access point e The WPS buttons on numerous access points were pressed simultaneously Try reconnecting again No access points found e Check to make sure that the access point is turned on e When connecting to an access point manually make sure that you entered the correct SSID Incorrect password Incorrect Wi Fi security settings e Check the access point security settings H4135 IP address conflict o Reset the IP address so that it does not conflict with another Disconnected Receiving failed Sending failed e You may be in an environment where Wi Fi signals are obstructed e Avoid using the camera s Wi Fi function around microwave ovens Bluetooth devices and other devices that operate on the 2 4 GHz band Basic Guide e Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to such as the access point and make sure there are no objects between the devices e Check the connected device to make sure it is not experiencing errors Advanced Guide Sending failed Before Use Memory card error 1 Camera Basics e If the same error message is displayed even when you have inserted a formatted memory card facing the correct way
119. E E E 163 Software Instruction Manual vssiciicinnis caricia iin 163 Computer Connections via a Cable neren 164 Checking Your Computer Environment c 0scceeeeeeeees 164 Installing the Software wu seccesnccrcsssseeecanexsasseneaseesmeendeeceneneeenens 164 Saving Images to a Computer coooooonccncccccccnnnnncnnnnnnnnnnnnnanonns 164 PANINO MAJE S cesaron loo coda 166 Edda 166 Configuring Print SCUINGS escasas 167 Cropping Images before Printing ccccooocccncccconnnnncnnos 167 Choosing Paper Size and Layout before Printing 168 Available Layout Onions sssciavizara arar 168 Printing ID Photos scada 168 Printing Movie SCONCS osease 169 Movie Printing Options nc seccoscncssssuaisscunexenenaseanscamexnesnceneneansiene 169 Adding Images to the Print List DPOF ooonncccnnncccccnnnnnnnnnnnno 169 Configuring Print Settigs cccoononncccnnnocccnnnncannnanononnns 169 Setting Up Printing for Individual Images 170 Setting Up Printing for a Range of IMages c ccooooccnnnnn 170 Setting Up Printing for All IMages ooonccccccccccconnnccnnnnnnnos 170 Clearing All Images from the Print List oo occcnnc 171 Printing Images Added to the Print List DPOP 171 Adding Images to a Photobook isos 171 Choosing a Selection Method occccoononncccnnoconnccccononinnnnns 171 Adding Images Individually ccccooocccn
120. Erasing all 116 Error messages 177 Exposure AE lock 74 Compensation 74 FE lock 89 F Face AiAF AF frame mode 84 Face ID 44 Face select 85 Face self timer shooting mode 65 Favorites 118 FE lock 89 File numbering 155 Fireworks shooting mode 56 Fish eye effect shooting mode 60 Flash Deactivating flash 88 Flash exposure compensation 89 On 88 Slow synchro 88 Focus bracketing 82 Focus check 112 Focusing AF frames 83 AF lock 87 AF point zoom 51 MF peaking 82 Servo AF 85 Touch AF 86 Focusing range Macro 81 Manual focus 81 Quick 57 Underwater macro 57 Focus lock 83 FUNC menu Basic operations 29 Table 183 FUNC menu layout 100 G Geotagging images 147 GPS information display 105 Grid lines 99 H Handheld nightscene shooting mode 55 HDMI cable 161 High dynamic range shooting mode 58 Household power 162 Hybrid Auto shooting mode 36 i Contrast 77 123 iFrame movies movie mode 72 Image quality Compression ratio image quality Images Display period 52 Erasing 116 Playback Viewing Protecting 114 Image stabilization 91 Image Sync 145 Indicator 32 52 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 198 ISO speed 75 J Jump display 109 L LCD monitor 28 M M shooting mode
121. Images may look grainy after repeated editing using this function RAW images cannot be edited this way Q e f Auto does not produce the expected results try correcting images using Low Medium or High nl NN e You can also configure this setting by touching gt on the screen in step 3 Correcting Red Eye gt gt Still Images Automatically corrects images affected by red eye You can save the corrected image as a separate file CAE Choose Red Eye Correction o Press the MENU button and then See choose Red Eye Correction on the BJ i Contrast tab 130 Red Eye Correction 2 Choose an image o Press the 4 buttons or turn the db dial to choose an image 3 Correct the image o Press the button 0 Red eye detected by the camera is now corrected and frames are displayed around corrected image areas Enlarge or reduce images as needed Follow the steps in Magnifying Images 10112 E 4 Save as a new image and review Red Eye Correction o Press the a W 4 buttons or turn the 4B dial to choose New File and then press the button SEPT o The image is now saved as a new file O Follow step 5 in Resizing Images 120 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode Index 7 Wi Fi Functions 8
122. M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode Wi Fi Functions Index 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 149 Returning the Wi Fi Settings to Default Before Use Return the Wi Fi settings to default if you transfer ownership of the camera to another person or dispose of it Resetting the Wi Fi settings will also clear all Web service settings Be l sure that you want to reset all Wi Fi settings before using this option Advanced Guide Basic Guide am Choose Wi Fi Settings Lema o Press the MENU button and choose Wi Fi Settings on the ff tab 1130 PMO Taca Touch Operat O gs fT 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Touch Response Standard Wi Fi Settings 3 Other Shooting Modes WEF Settings 2 Choose Reset Settings 4 P Mode EINEN O Press the a w buttons or turn the 4 dial to choose Reset Settings and then Check MAC Address J T i A M d C Mod Reset Settings press the button 5 Tv Av M an ode 3 Restore the default settings 6 Playback Mode o Press the 4 buttons or turn the di dial to choose OK and then press the 5 button o The Wi Fi settings are now reset 8 Setting Menu e To reset other settings aside from Wi Fi to defaults choose O Accessories Reset All on the ff tab 157 10 Appendix Index lt gt 5 150 Adjusting Basic Camera Functions Before Use MENU L430 functions on the ff tab can be configured Customize Basi
123. M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Index O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 157 System Map Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Included Accessories Battery Pack Battery Charger Wrist Strap NB 13L CB 2LH CB 2LHE e E Auto Mode USB Cable camera end Mini B Os Hybrid Auto Mode Accessories 3 Other Shooting Modes Enjoy the camera in more ways with optional Canon Memory Card Card Reader Computer 4 P Mode accessories and other compatible accessories sold PictBridge Compatible Printers 5 Tv Av M and C Mode p ara te y ce am O HDMI Cable camera end Type D 6 Playback Mode Cables 7 Wi Fi Functions E AC Adapter Kit Stereo AV Cable 8 Setting Menu TV Video AVC DC400ST ACK DC110 System Flash Unit 10 Appendix Index High Power Flash HF DC2 WP DC54 4 Also available for purchase separately 2 A genuine Canon accessory is also available Interface Cable IFC 400PCU 3 Use a commercially available cable no longer than 2 5 m 8 2 ft 158 Use of genuine Canon accessories is recommended This product is designed to achieve excellent performance when used with genuine Canon accessories Canon shall not be liable for any damage to this product and or accidents such as fire etc caused by the malfunction of non genuine Canon accessories e
124. O Time Zone A Lens Retraction lt 1 min Eco Mode Off Power Saving LCD Brightness a Q e For maximum brightness press and hold the V button for at least one second when the shooting screen is displayed or when in single image display This will override the LCD Brightness setting on the TT tab To restore the original brightness press and hold the V button again for at least one second or restart the camera Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 92 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Index O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 153 Start Up Screen Customize the start up screen shown after you turn the camera on as follows e Choose Start up Image and then press the button o Press the 4 buttons or turn the di dial to choose an option Canon Start up Image ie Formatting Memory Cards Before using a new memory card or a card formatted in another device you should format the card with this camera Formatting erases all data on a memory card Before formatting copy images on the memory card to a computer or take other steps to back them up 4 Access the Format screen Choose Format and then press the button Format 2 Choose OK Format memory card O Press the a w buttons to choose 7 568 Cancel choose OK
125. P e AUTO ON 8 2 82 02 R See a C2 gt PAY GA S R gc TE OURAN E YY 1 Y aF AE n E i lt gt 186 Off C M Av Tv P A amp A SE IKE WRI B D OD B ON a AUTO ON D L C3 0 R Wr ANP On CMA TVP a AUTO O B 18 Cs VENAS 0 Off C M Av Tv P 38 AUTO O1 D L C3 03 89 MR A A BID 1E M 9 3 0 4 2 4d 2 P E AF assist Beam 1152 On y Sa y ae A me ye Off C M Av Tv P a AUTO DI 3 2 BR ASF B 418 3 H 9 3 0 4 92 4 ANP Y MF Point Zoom 481 Off C M Av Tv P as AUTO On B E oE EE nA E oN 2x SE A F AU CN fe BHR UTO O D L R 1 3 0 4 2 4 2 P Ax 7 M Av Tv Ps AUTO a ISI A P F YA UE EDO 1107 21 148 ANP a C M Av Tv P 8 AUTO CO D 2 02 A P E kB MAIRI AND MIA E Off C M Av Tv P as AUTO Cu D C3 C2 BA CAV 1 E Be ee ADR Gd 3 0 14 2 4 2 P Pam all ne MF Peaking Settings 482 Peaking On Off C M Av Tv P AUT LE IS ACA ASADAS O Sh B D A 4 AVP Pam al Level Low High CoM Ay Ty Pie AUTO O D E C3 6 CA SP B B S THOR 1 cd D 2 28 4 AN P Pam al Color Red Yellow Blue C M Av Tv P 2 yE AUTO MDL WATE A S A c g 10 9 09 DD 4 8 E all as Before Use Basic Guide On 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid
126. Self Timer to Avoid Camera Shake gt gt Still Images gt Movies This option delays shutter release until about two seconds after you have pressed the shutter button If the camera is unsteady while you are pressing the shutter button it will not affect your shot O Follow step 1 in Using the Self Timer 1141 and choose C3 o Once the setting is complete 03 is displayed 0 Follow step 2 in Using the Self Timer 12141 to shoot Customizing the Self Timer gt gt Still Images gt Movies You can specify the delay 0 30 seconds and number of shots 1 10 Choose o Following step 1 in Using the Self Timer 1141 choose 2 and press the RNG button 2 Configure the setting o Turn the ring to choose the Delay time either press the d4 buttons or turn the dB dial to choose the number of Shots and then press the 9 button o Once the setting is complete X is displayed 0 Follow step 2 in Using the Self Timer 12141 to shoot e For movies shot using the self timer Delay represents the delay before recording begins but the Shots setting has no effect Q e When you specify multiple shots image brightness and white balance are determined by the first shot More time is required between shots when the flash fires or when you have specified to take many shots Shooting will stop automatically when the memory card becomes full e
127. When a delay longer than two seconds is specified two seconds before the shot the lamp blinking and self timer sound will speed up The lamp will remain lit in case the flash fires Shooting by Touching the Screen Touch Shutter gt gt Still Images With this option instead of pressing the shutter button you can simply touch the screen and release your finger to shoot The camera will focus on subjects and adjust image brightness automatically 4 Enable touch shutter function o Press the MENU button choose Touch Shutter on the g tab and then choose On H30 Digital Zoom Standard AF Point Zoom uch Shutte AF assist Beam Flash Settings 2 Shoot e Touch the subject on the screen and then lift your finger immediately o The camera shoots as a shutter sound is played e To cancel touch shutter choose Off in step 1 1 Even while the shot is displayed you can prepare for the next shot by touching Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Index Camera Basics 92 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 42 Continuous Shooting gt gt Still Images In AUTO mode hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot continuously For details on the continuous shooting speed see Continuous Shooting Speed
128. White balance is not available 1 SAJNA 4 Setin a range of 1 5 contrast sharpness color saturation red green blue aN Enh y Hrn A f F A y E ae Basic Guide and skin tone Te a 5 Cannot be set to 0 seconds in modes without selection of the number of shots 6 One shot cannot be modified in modes without selection of the number of shots 1 6x 2 0x Advanced Guide 7 Synchronizes with the aspect ratio setting and is automatically set H461 C M Av Tv P 58 AUTO O1 D L 72 03 B9 M9 5 i CA 7 2 wW S Re E EON i o Camera Basics Shooting Tab O E O gt a 92 Auto Mode AF Frame 183 AF Point Zoom L51 Hybrid Auto Mode Ae On Face AIAF 3 Other Shooting Modes C M Av Tv P AUTO OY 90 2 82 BR C M Av Tv P S a AR III en a e ARAU S R O a S AMP a IE DIA 2 Ls BT A e a eee 4 P Mode Of 1 point 5 Tv Av M and C Mode ss x C M Av Tv P 4 AUTO O09 22 02 BB Sh EN aa a o A E y ET By IE 6 Playback Mode B O NS 1y AF Frame Size 84 Servo AF 2185 7 Wi Fi Functions Normal on C M Av Tv P A AUTO ODE RA A AUTO OD LIC 02 RA 8 Setting Menu PA x G8 e AE S HDR amp p 5 00 2 8 4 A P a 50 HDR 0 lt 2 0 4 EAP Ls 9 Accessories Small Of C M Av Tv P S AUTO O0 B E C3 C3 RIB A ee ASPEN OB CID E QP an eee Pa wl a Index Digital Zoom 1140 Continuous AF 1185 Standard On C M Av Tv
129. Wi Fi Web Services Add your account information to the camera for CANON iMAGE GATEWAY online photography service or other Web services to send camera images to the services Unsent images on the camera can also be sent automatically to a computer or Web service via CANON IMAGE GATEWAY Printers Send images wirelessly to a PictBridge compatible printer Supporting DPS over IP to print them Another Camera Send images wirelessly between Wi Fi compatible Canon cameras Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions Index 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix 127 Sending Images to a Smartphone Connect the camera to a smartphone and send images in either of these ways e Connect to a device assigned to the button LU 128 Simply press the LJ button to connect the devices This simplifies importing images from a smartphone 4128 Note that only one smartphone can be assigned to the LJ button e Connect via the Wi Fi menu H4130 You can connect the camera to a smartphone as you would connect it to a computer or other device Multiple smartphones can be added Before connecting to the camera you must install the free dedicated CameraWindow app on the smartphone For details on this application Supported smartphones and included functions refer to the Canon website e No matter h
130. You can return to single image display from magnified display by pressing the MENU button e You can check the focus when 33 is displayed by pressing the 9 button to show the position in focus Focus Check When multiple positions are in focus press the 6 button repeatedly to switch to other positions Touch Screen Operations e Spread your fingers apart pinch out to zoom in e You can magnify images up to about 10x by repeating this action o To move the display position drag across the screen Pinch in to zoom out e Touch MAM to restore single image display Viewing Slideshows gt gt Still Images gt Movies Automatically play back images from a memory card as follows 4 Access the setting screen EE o Press the MENU button and then TSE choose Slideshow on the tab Slideshow 130 Erase pa O rT Image Search Slideshow 2 Configure the setting Em e Choose a menu item to configure and J Effect then choose the desired option L130 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode Index 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 112 2 Choose an image o Press the a W 4 buttons to choose the image you want to view next 3 Start automatic playback O Press the a
131. a EN e Recording may stop even if the maximum clip length has not been reached on some memory cards SD Speed Class 6 or higher memory cards are recommended Flash Range Maximum wide angle 444 50 cm 7 0 m 1 6 23 ft Maximum telephoto C amp J 40 cm 4 0 m 1 3 13 ft Shooting Range Shooting Focusing Maimun D Angle Maximum Telephoto Mode Range EEA AUTO 5cm 2 0 in infinity 5 cm 2 0 in infinity 40 cm 1 3 ft 40 om 1 3 ft infinity infinity A 5 cm 2 0 in infinity 40 cm 1 3 ft infinity 5 50 cm 2 0 in 1 6 ft PT TANTA Other modes E ae cm 2 0 in 5 cm 2 0 in infinity infinity 40 cm 1 3 40 cm 1 3 ft infinity infinity 2 0 in 1 6 ft a 15 20 m 4 9 66 ft 1 5 20 m 4 9 66 ft Not available in some shooting modes Continuous Shooting Speed ciliate Seale Approx 4 4 shots sec Approx 4 4 shots sec e Using an 8 GB UHS memory card specified in Canon testing standards Note that the number of shots varies depending on subjects the brand of memory card and other factors Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix Index lt gt 5 196 Shutter Speed Battery Charger CB 2LH CB 2LHE
132. a focuses changes to o Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot Q e When Face ID is set to On names of any registered people detected are not displayed when you have selected another unregistered face to focus on However their names will be recorded in the still images L144 Choosing Subjects to Focus On Touch AF gt gt Still Images gt Movies You can shoot after choosing a person s face or another subject to focus on da aa E Set the AF frame to Face AiAF f 84 2 Choose a person s face or another subject to focus on e Touch the subject or person on the screen o When the subject is detected the camera beeps and is displayed Focus is maintained even if the subject moves e To cancel Touch AF touch SD 3 Shoot o Press the shutter button halfway After the camera focuses changes to a green _ O Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode Index 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 86 1 e If you prefer the camera not to shoot when you touch the screen make sure Touch Shutter mode is deactivated Press the IMENU button choose Touch Shutter on the E tab and then choose Off 30 e Tracki
133. aces e When the camera detects movement frames will follow moving subjects within a certain range e After you press the shutter button halfway up to nine green frames are displayed around faces in focus 1 When no faces are detected or when only gray frames are displayed without a white frame pressing the shutter button halfway will display green frames in the areas in focus Note that the maximum number of frames depends on the aspect ratio 1148 setting 3 2 or 4 3 31 frames 1 1 or 4 5 25 frames 16 9 21 frames If faces are not detected when Servo AF 185 is set to On the AF frame is displayed in the center of the screen when you press the shutter button halfway e Examples of faces that cannot be detected Subjects that are distant or extremely close Subjects that are dark or light Faces in profile at an angle or partly hidden The camera may misinterpret non human subjects as faces No AF frames are displayed if the camera cannot focus when you press the shutter button halfway Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode Index 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 84 Shooting with Servo AF gt gt Still Images This mode helps avoid missing shots of subjects in motion because the camera continue
134. ages by touching the screen in step 2 Images can also be tagged as favorites by using Touch Actions A119 Convenient Control Touch Actions gt gt Still Images gt Movies You can quickly and easily activate functions that you have assigned to four touch gestures Touch Actions in single image display Using Touch Actions Functions o Drag across the screen as shown Tag as Favorite To Smartphone o The function assigned to H is now activated Similarly you can also activate functions assigned to P el and Ly by dragging across the screen Customize functions assigned to Touch Actions as desired Changing Touch Actions Functions Simplify your preferred camera operations by reassigning dragging patterns to them as desired 4 Access the setting screen o Press the MENU button and then choose Set Touch Actions on the D tab 430 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode Index 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 119 2 Assign a function to a Touch Action Set Touch ctions Favorites O Press the A W buttons or turn the di To Smartphone Ena dial to choose a dragging pattern and Slideshow then press the 4 buttons to choose the function to assign
135. ailable in Basic Guide the current shooting mode or under current function conditions With EX you can move and resize the AF frame by pressing the The display of FUNC menu items can be customized Functions not RNG button in 1 point AF frame mode 1183 1184 shown on this menu will be available on the PY tab of the menu screen Advanced Guide With 3 or 2 each press of the assigned button records n white balance data Q179 and the white balance setting Choosing Items to Include in the Menu Camera Basics changes to 8 or 18 With AFL each press of the assigned button adjusts and locks P Still Images P gt Movies 9 Auto Mode the focus AFL is then displayed Hybrid Auto Mode With x pressing the assigned button deactivates screen eit x q Access the setting screen Pee ae E i er Shooting Modes display To restore the display do any of the following Face IO Settings e Press the MENU button choose 3 g Press any button other than the power button Set Control Ring Func SID AEREA FUNC Menu Layout on the g tab Set button e and then press the button H30 4 P Mode FUNC Menu Layout 5 Tv Av M and C Mode Hold the camera in another orientation Open or close the screen Raise or lower the flash You can still record movies in y PB PE or m mode even ds Ae a ae ae UNC Menu Layout 2 Choose icons to include in the menu a DR Correction Playback M
136. annot magnify Cannot play back this content in Smart Shuffle Cannot rotate Cannot modify image Cannot modify Cannot assign to category Unselectable image No identification information e The following functions may be unavailable for images that were renamed or already edited on a computer or images shot with another camera Note that starred functions are not available for movies Edit ID Info 01111 Magnify 11112 Smart Shuffle 41113 Rotate 11117 Favorites 118 Edit 1120 Print List 1169 and Photobook Set up 11171 Invalid selection range e When specifying a range for image selection 12115 01117 11170 you attempted to choose an initial image that was after the final image or vice versa Exceeded selection limit e More than 998 images were selected for Print List 169 or Photobook Set up 11171 Choose 998 images or less e Print List 1169 or Photobook Set up 4171 settings could not be saved correctly Reduce the number of selected images and try again e You attempted to choose more than 500 images in Protect 44114 Erase 4116 Favorites L118 Print List 11169 or Photobook Set up 1171 Naming error e The folder could not be created or images could not be recorded because the highest supported folder number 999 for storing images on the card has been reached and the highest supported image number 9999 for images in folders has been reached On the YT tab change File Num
137. ard Images resemble paintings with subdued contrast Art Vivid Images resemble vivid illustrations Art Bold Images resemble oil paintings with bold edges Art Embossed O Follow steps 1 2 in Image Effects Creative Filters 1158 and choose HDR e Turn the ring to choose an effect o A preview is shown of how your shot will look with the effect applied Images resemble old photos with bold edges and dark ambiance Shooting with Faded Colors Nostalgic ES 2 Choose an effect level Do 3 Shoot e Try taking some test shots first to make sure you obtain the desired results e Colors will look faded on the shooting screen but the image aging effect is not shown Review the image in Playback mode to see the effect A103 e The image aging effect is not shown in movies gt gt Still Images gt Movies This effect makes colors look faded and images look weathered as in old photographs Choose from five effect levels 4 Choose 8 Follow steps 1 2 in Image Effects Creative Filters 1158 and choose o Turn the Z ring to choose an effect o A preview is shown of how your shot will look with the effect applied Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendi
138. arging Shooting can resume as soon as the flash is ready so either press the shutter button all the way down and wait or release it and press it again The shutter sound will not be played when the Sleeping and Babies Sleeping icons H438 are displayed Although you can shoot again before the shooting screen is displayed your previous shot may determine the focus brightness and colors used You can change how long images are displayed after shots 52 Movies 1 Keep your fingers away from the microphone 1 while shooting movies Blocking the microphone may prevent audio from being recorded or may cause the recording to sound muffled Avoid touching camera controls other than the movie button when shooting movies because sounds made by the camera will be recorded Once movie recording begins the image display area changes and subjects are enlarged to allow for correction of significant camera shake To shoot subjects at the same size shown before shooting adjust the image stabilization setting H491 Audio is recorded in stereo Distorted audio caused by recording when the wind is strong can be reduced However the recording may sound unnatural when this option is used when there is no wind When the wind is not strong choose MENU 1130 gt g tab gt Wind Filter gt Off Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 92 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Mode
139. ation name birthday will be saved on the camera Additionally when registered people are detected their names will be recorded in still images When using the Face ID function be careful when sharing the camera or images with others and when posting images online where many others can view them e When disposing of a camera or transferring it to another person after using Face ID be sure to erase all information registered faces names and birthdays from the camera 1148 Registering Face ID Information You can register information face info names birthdays for up to 12 people to use with Face ID Access the setting screen o Press the MENU button choose Face ID Settings on the gj tab and then press the button 30 o iT x Blink Detection Custom Display Reverse Disp IS Settings Face 1D Settings ro O Press the A W buttons or turn the dB e dial to choose Add to Registry and then press the button Add to Registry menu d O Press the a w buttons or turn the dial to choose Add a New Face and then press the button Add to Registry 0 12 People Add a New Face Set a new face for focus priority and optimized settings m d 2 Register face information Add to Registry Keep the face within the o Aim the camera so that the face of the person you want to register is inside the gray frame at the center of the screen trame then shoot
140. be displayed on the camera to warn you that the dial to specify the number of prints up Basic Guide memory card has print settings that were configured on another to 99 camera Changing the print settings using this camera may ES xa ox e To set up printing for other images and SR GUIAS overwrite all previous settings specify the number of prints repeat steps 2 3 o Printing quantity cannot be specified for index prints You can only choose which Camera Basics Q e Specifying Index will prevent you from choosing On for both Auto Mode Date and File No at the same time images to print by following step 2 2 Hybrid Auto Mode e Index printing is not available on some Canon brand PictBridge o When finished press the MENU button compatible printers sold separately to return to the menu screen 3 Other Shooting Modes e The date is printed in a format matching setting details in Date Time on the ff tab 20 Setting Up Printing for a Range of Images 4 PMode gt gt Still Images Setting Up Printing for Individual Images e e Following step 1 in Setting Up Printing 5 Tv Av M and C Mode for Individual Images 0170 choose Still Images gt A Select Range and press the button 6 Playback Mode inii e Follow steps 2 3 in Selecting a Range Choose Select Images amp Qty ate 1 l g y 11115 to specify images 7 Wi Fi Functions A o Press the MENU button choose El O Press the A W b
141. bering to Auto Reset 01155 or format the memory card 4154 Lens Error e This error may occur if the lens is held while it is moving or when the camera is used in dusty or sandy locations e Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage In this case contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix Index lt gt 5 1 7 A camera error was detected error number e Ifthis error message is displayed immediately after a shot the image may not have been saved Switch to Playback mode to check for the image e Frequent display of this error message may indicate camera damage In this case write down the error number Exx and contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk File Error e Correct printing 166 may not be possible for photos from other cameras or images that have been altered using computer software even if the camera is connected to the printer Print error e Check the paper size setting H4168 If this error message is displayed when the setting is correct restart the printer and complete the setting on the camera again Ink absorber full e Contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk to request assistance with ink absorber replacement Wi Fi
142. ble in NE mode Correcting Greenish Image Areas from Mercury Lamps gt gt Still Images In AUTO mode subjects or background in shots of evening scenes illuminated by mercury lamps may appear to have a greenish tinge This greenish tinge can be corrected automatically when shooting using Multi area White Balance o Press the MENU button choose Hg Lamp Corr on the tab and then choose On 1130 o Once the setting is complete LA is displayed a o To restore the original setting repeat this AF Point Zoom process but choose Off Touch Shutter AF assist Beam Flash Settings Ha Lamp Corr 1 After you are finished shooting under mercury lamps you should set Hg Lamp Corr back to Off Otherwise green hues not caused by mercury lamps may be corrected by mistake Q e Try taking some test shots first to make sure you obtain the desired results e In continuous shooting 43 this setting is set to Off and cannot be changed Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Index Camera Basics 92 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 49 Changing Movie Image Quality B Movies 4 image quality settings are available For guidelines on the maximum movie length at each level of image quality that will fit on a memory
143. buttons or turn the dial to choose PBC Method and then press the button 7 Establish the connection e On the access point hold down the WPS connection button for a few seconds e On the camera press the button to go to the next step e The camera connects to the access point and lists devices connected to it on the Select a Device screen Select a Device Refresh Windows Search complete tam gt Connecting Cc Connected device Windows Canon 1000000000 Ea Change program You cen change the program to use for this task mr Import pictures and videos See usi 8 Choose the target device Choose the target device name either press the A W buttons or turn the 4h dial and then press the button 9 install a driver first Windows connection only o When this screen is displayed on the camera click the Start menu on the computer click Control Panel and then click Add a device Double click the connected camera icon O Driver installation will begin o After driver installation is complete and the camera and computer connection is enabled the AutoPlay screen will be displayed Nothing will be displayed on the camera screen 10 Display CameraWindow Windows Access CameraWindow by clicking Downloads Images From Canon Camera Mac OS CameraWindow is automatically displayed when a Wi Fi connection is establ
144. c Guide commonly used functions as desired for greater convenience a Advanced Guide Silencing Camera Operations Silence camera sounds and movies as follows 1 Camera Basics Choose Mute and then choose On Auto Mode 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Setting Menu 3 Other Shooting Modes E Hints amp Tips On Date Time 08 08 14 10 00 Customize or adjust basic camera functions for A P Mode greater convenience Operation can also be silenced by holding down the V button 5 Tv Av M and C Mode as you turn the camera on Sound is not played during movies 4103 if you mute camera G Playback Mode sounds To restore sound during movies press the 44 button or drag up across the screen Adjust volume as needed by pressing the A J W buttons or by dragging up or down 7 Wi Fi Functions vet Adjusting the Volume e Q Accessories Adjust the volume of individual camera sounds as follows Choose Volume and then press the Nome O O Appendi O button E Dpto asm Choose an item and then press the Selftimer Vol Index 4 buttons to adjust the volume Shutter Volume E 151 Customizing Sounds Customize camera operating sounds as follows e Choose Sound Options and then press the 9 button e Choose an item and then press the 4 buttons to choose an option Sound Options Start up Sound Operation Sound Selftimer Sound Shutter Sound G The shutter sound in digest
145. can assign aperture value or shutter speed adjustment to the ring A gt 4 97 Assigning Functions to the Control Ring gt gt Still Images gt Movies Assign functions to the control ring based on each shooting mode Choose C Following step 1 in Changing Control Ring Settings H97 choose C and press the MENU button Set Control Ring Func 2 Configure the setting ISO Speed o Press the 4 buttons or turn the 4 p dial to choose the shooting mode with functions to assign i O Press the a w buttons or turn the ring to choose a function to assign to the control ring 1 o Functions you can assign to the control dial will be updated automatically o Press the MENU button to return to the shooting screen D e You can also access the setting screen by choosing IC and touching MIN in step 1 of Changing Control Ring Settings L197 e On the setting screen you can also configure the functions assigned to the control ring by touching the functions and then MEMO Using the Control Ring for Adjustment gt gt Still Images You can turn the control ring for instant adjustment of ISO speed shutter speed and aperture value as you touch the screen to switch between these items e Touch the right edge in the area outlined in this example to view menu items drag up or down to choose an item and turn the ring to specify a value Available setting items var
146. card see Recording Time per Memory Card 196 O Press the button choose ry EN in the menu and choose the desired option ENS 29 e The option you configured is now displayed o To restore the original setting repeat this process but choose yp Ey mege Resolution Frame Rate Details Quality wE 1920 x1080 60 fps For shooting in Full HD EE enables movies with smoother motion HEN 1920x 1080 30 fps 1280 x 720 30 fps For shooting in HD For shooting in standard Q e Black bars displayed on the top and bottom in Em EWI Erm E and Eup E modes and on the left and right in Ey AD mode indicate image areas not recorded Helpful Shooting Features Using the Dual Axis Electronic Level gt gt Still Images gt Movies An electronic level can be displayed as a guideline to ensure the camera is level from front to back and left to right Display the electronic level a O O Press the V button several times to display the electronic level PUTO 10 2 4L 1547 50 3455 2 Straighten the camera o 1 indicates the front back orientation and 2 the left right orientation o f the camera is tilted move it so that the red line changes to green Q e Ifthe electronic level is not displayed in step 1 press the IMENU button and on the iE tab choose Custom Display Add a V to Y or Y to choose the electronic level e The electronic level is not display
147. cccoooconcnnonannnoss 172 Adding All Images to a Photobook oocccccoooccccccccccccnnncnoncnnos 172 Removing All Images from a Photobook ceeeeeeeees 172 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Index 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 11 A 173 sisi elaine ee Radio Wave Interference Precautions ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeees 201 TROIS OMIA E A ies Security PRECAUTIONS ncssscajscsniaseaninaaiaiacriiitaremeacneeasaanaayiaeninny 201 a E On Screen Message inninntc 7 Trademarks and Licensing 202 OS A IMTOMIMI ANON sisemisi ennaii 179 e 202 SS Shooting Information Display oooocccnnnccccnnnononccnnnnnononananos 179 Battery Level rca niendo 179 Pere Playback Detailed Information Display oooococoooo 180 Summary of Movie Control Panel cccccccssseseeeeeeeeeeeaes 180 Ruta Moder Functions and Menu Tables 0 cc c cesesseseeseseesessesseseseeees 181 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Functions Available in Each Shooting Mode ooooocccncncncc o 181 3 Other Shooting Modes FUNC MO ns aunado pides 183 Shooting Tai 186 4 P Mode 210 lo Ta PO A o EEE E eee eee ee ere 192 M Meno Tab 192 5 Tv Av M and C Mode Playback Tab APP A gt RPmm A aiceotaneds 192 PWM A tenance E E E 193 G Playback Mode Hand
148. ccnnccononicnncnnnnnnns 74 Linking the Spot AE Point Frame to the AF Frame 75 Changing the ISO SHOP nicol ii 75 Adjusting ISO Auto Settings cecniasisaa dto 76 Changing the Noise Reduction Level High ISO NR 76 Auto Exposure Bracketing AEB Shooting ooooccccccccoo 76 Correcting Image Brightness i Contrast ccceccessseeeeeeeeees 77 Dynamic Range Correction DR Correction 77 Shadow COM dto 78 Using the ND Filter 78 Mage Col osiarsticoio ei 78 Adjusting White Balan said 78 Custom White Balance scudo dae 79 Manually Correcting White Balance ooccccccnnoccnncccnnnnnoos 79 Changing Image Color Tones My Colors ooooocccccnccccccoononooo 80 Custom COlOT A Em 80 Shooting Range and FOCUSINQ cccccccocooccnnccconnnccconncnonancnonons 81 Shooting Close Ups Macro ccccccccoonococcconococccononccnnnnnnnnnonananenos 81 Shooting in Manual Focus Mode ooooocccccccccccccoccccnnncccnnnnnnonnnnnnos 81 Easily Identifying the Focus Area MF Peaking 82 Focus Bracketing Focus BKT Mode ooocccccccccccnncccconnonnnnno 82 Digital Tele Converter sois 83 Changing the AF Frame Mode oocccccooccniccccnoconccconnccnonconanononnnns 83 f OID APP oo a 83 Moving and Resizing AF Frames 1 point ccccccccccoconnncnnnnno 84 Face AAF OOOO e 84 Shooting with Servo AF oooooocccnnnccccconononononcnnnccnncccnono
149. ce be sure to use this product as far away as possible from such devices or avoid using the devices at the same time as this product Security Precautions Because Wi Fi uses radio waves to transmit signals security precautions more stringent than when using a LAN cable are required Keep the following points in mind when using Wi Fi Only use networks you are authorized to use This product searches for Wi Fi networks in the vicinity and displays the results on the screen Networks you are not authorized to use unknown networks may also be displayed However attempting to connect to or using such networks could be regarded as unauthorized access Be sure to use only networks you are authorized to use and do not attempt to connect to other unknown networks If security settings have not been properly set the following problems may occur Transmission monitoring Third parties with malicious intent may monitor Wi Fi transmissions and attempt to acquire the data you are sending Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Index 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 201 e Unauthorized network access Third parties with malicious intent may gain unauthorized access to the network you are using to steal modify or destroy information Additionally you could
150. ces or backgrounds can be detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal brightness To avoid washed out highlights specify Dynamic Range Correction To preserve image detail in shadows specify Shadow Correct Under some shooting conditions correction may be inaccurate or may cause images to appear grainy e You can also correct existing images H4123 e You can customize camera operation so that turning the E ring adjusts DR Correction or Shadow Correct settings L197 Dynamic Range Correction DR Correction gt gt Still Images Tone down bright image areas which might otherwise look washed out as follows o Press the 9 button choose Gr in the menu and choose the desired option 129 e The option you configured is now displayed Available ISO Speed Automatic adjustment to prevent washed out highlights ee age eae Tone down highlights by about 200 relative to the brightness level of Corr AUTO 250 6400 ISO speed H475 will be adjusted to a speed within the supported range if you have specified a value outside the supported range indicated here Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode Index 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 if Shadow Correct gt gt Still Images Automatically preser
151. ck or an AC adapter kit sold separately H4159 Reducing File Sizes Movie file sizes can be reduced by compressing movies as follows ME gt e On the screen in step 2 of Editing Movies choose X Choose New File and then press the 9 button e Choose Compress amp Sav and then press the button Save w o Comp Cancel G Compressed movies are saved in Epp E format o Eai movies cannot be compressed e Edited movies cannot be saved in compressed format when you choose Overwrite e You can also edit movies by touching the movie editing panel or editing bar Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode Index 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 125 Editing Digest Movies gt gt Movies Individual chapters clips 136 recorded in JE mode can be erased as needed Be careful when erasing clips because they cannot be recovered Select the clip to erase O Follow steps 1 2 in Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting Still Images Digest Movies 4106 to oi ib A g play a movie created in N mode and 1200 gt then press the 9 button to access the movie control panel o Press the 4 buttons or turn the dif dial to choose lt Q or gt and then press the 9
152. computer or smartphone to register Web services H138 To add a smartphone first install the dedicated application CameraWindow on your smartphone 4128 To add a computer first install the software CameraWindow on your computer Also check your computer and Wi Fi environment and settings 4133 11135 Do not use the camera near sources of Wi Fi signal interference such as microwave ovens Bluetooth devices or other equipment operating on the 2 4 GHZ band Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to such as the access point and make sure there are no objects between the devices Cannot connect to the access point Confirm that the access point channel is set to a channel supported by the camera 11194 Note that instead of auto channel assignment it is advisable to specify a supported channel manually Cannot send images The destination device has insufficient storage space Increase the storage space on the destination device and resend the images The write protect tab of the memory card in the destination camera is set to the locked position Slide the write protect tab to the unlocked position RAW images cannot be sent In ae mode only the JPEG images are sent However RAW images can be sent using Image Sync Images are not sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services if you move or rename image files or folders on the computer that received images sent using Image Sync via an acces
153. coooccnnnccccnnncnanaconnnnnnos 149 Erasing Connection Information ccccccceeeeeeeeeseseeeees 149 Returning the Wi Fi Settings to Default oo o nonncccnncc o 150 Senna Melania i as 151 Adjusting Basic Camera Functions ccocoooococcccccncnncnconcnnnnns 151 Silencing Camera OperattiOns ccccccsssessseeeeeeeeeeeneesseeeees 151 Adjusting the Volume sconioci nnssaai tio cs 151 Customizing SOUMOS vcs csi casiinacudticatasissntdaraatdsnnddveulssioccstieasmiuinasdts 152 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Index 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 10 Hiding Hints and TS its 152 D te and TIME escenes abrar ER fete 152 World Clock io ias 152 Lens Retraction Ti irradia 153 Using Eco MOdE arrancarte 153 Power Saving Adjustment oooooccnnncccccnoncnnnonnnnnococonannnnnnnnnnnnns 153 Screen Brightness Suse ac 153 Start Up SCKe C Micsvinensuseententcuasnersaxeazemsianauidenacohosecsialssannasctmedemenes 154 Formatting Memory Cals ii c cc0sisssedsaisruespevlawestieccsevaveaeieiecnneds 154 Low Level Formatting oocccccooncnonnccnnononnnonanononcnonannnnnns 154 File INU ING tinte nt ceaetadian toute enojada 155 Date Based Image Storage ooooonnnccnnnccccnnnocnnccnnononononanannnnnnnnos 155 Metric Non Metric
154. creen o Press the MENU button Indicator Display The indicator on the back of the camera H4 lights up or blinks depending on the camera status leia Camera Status om tus elias toa a 101164 or display off jon Comet 1153 01153 Green Scns up aa a a images Blinking shooting long exposures H493 H494 or connecting transmitting via Wi Fi When the indicator blinks green never turn the camera off open the memory card battery cover or shake or jolt the camera which may corrupt images or damage the camera or memory card Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Index Camera Basics 9 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 32 You can check the current time o Press and hold the 9 button o The current time appears e f you hold the camera vertically while using the clock function it will switch to vertical display Press the q gt buttons or turn the dB dial to change the display color O Press the button again to cancel the clock display e When the camera is off press and hold the O button then press the power button to display the clock Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Index Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 P
155. ct each other automatically e Some security software may prevent you from completing the settings as described here Check the settings of your security software O For instructions on checking your network Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode Wi Fi Functions Index 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 134 Saving Images to a Connected Computer Connect to your access point via Wi Fi as follows Also refer to the access point user manual Confirming Access Point Compatibility Confirm that the Wi Fi router or base station conforms to the Wi Fi standards in Wi Fi 11194 Connection methods vary depending on whether the access point supports Wi Fi Protected Setup WPS 1135 or not 21137 For non WPS access points check the following information e Network name SSID ESSID The SSID or ESSID for the access point you use Also called the access point name or network name e Network authentication data encryption encryption method encryption mode The method for encrypting data during wireless transmission Check which security setting is used WPA2 PSK AES WPA2 PSK TKIP WPA PSK AES WPA PSK TKIP WEP open system authentication or no security e Password encryption key network key The key used when encrypting data duri
156. cus Soft Focus 162 162 e Focus on faces L134 L155 Les Les e Without using the flash Flash Off N34 e Include yourself in the shot Self Timer 41 A65 e Use Face ID Mas 1107 e Movie clips and photos together Movie Digest N36 Aged Photos 59 O Toy Camera Effect 161 li Monochrome 163 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix Index lt gt 5 13 gt View e View images Playback Mode 11103 e Automatic playback Slideshow 0112 e OnaTV 01161 e Onacomputer 01164 e Browse through images quickly 11107 e Erase images 01116 WW Shoot View Movies e Shoot movies W134 W471 LH96 e View movies Playback Mode 1103 gt Print e Print pictures 01166 U Save e Save images to a computer via a cable 01164 P Use Wi Fi Functions e Send images to a smartphone 1128 e Share images online 11138 e Send images to a computer 0145 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Index 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appe
157. d 440 When a TV is used as a display R4161 Not available in N mode Checking for Closed Eyes gt gt Still Images 2 is displayed when the camera detects that people may have closed their eyes 4 Configure the settings o Press the MENU button choose Blink Detection on the E tab and then choose On 1130 Flash Settings Hg Lamp Corr Off Wind Filter Auto Review image after shooting Blink Detection On 2 Shoot o PJ flashes when the camera detects a person whose eyes are closed o To restore the original setting choose Off in step 1 Q e When you have specified multiple shots in IRC mode this function is only available for the final shot e A frame is displayed around people whose eyes are closed when you have selected 2 sec 4 sec 8 sec or Hold in Display Time 1152 e This feature is not available during continuous shooting in 2 mode 1139 e This feature is not available in continuous shooting mode Mas 1187 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Index Camera Basics 92 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 51 Customizing Camera Operation Customize shooting functions on the f Y tab of the menu screen as follows For instructions on menu functions see Using
158. de 6 Playback Mode Index 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 110 Editing Face ID Information If you notice that a name is incorrect during playback you can change it or erase it However you cannot add names for people who are not detected by Face ID names are not displayed and for people whose names have been erased Changing Names HZ 4 Access the setting screen o Press the MENU button and choose Face ID Info on the tab 130 Overwrite or erase a person s ID into dial to choose Edit ID Info and then o Press the 4 w buttons or turn the db 4 Choose the name of the person to overwrite with O Follow step 2 in Overwriting and Adding Face Information L147 to choose the name of the person you want to overwrite with UN e You can also access the Edit ID Info screen by touching an image on the screen in step 2 touching SET to display the orange frame and then touching the face to overwrite its name e You can also choose editing options by touching them in step 3 Erasing Names Following step 3 in Changing Names Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 11111 choose Erase and press the 5 button gt 2 Choose an image o After Erase is displayed press the e o Followi
159. dix lt gt 5 68 Shooting Movies of Star Movement Star Time Lapse Movie gt gt Movies By recording a time lapse movie that combines images shot at a specified interval you can create movies with fast moving stars You can adjust the shooting interval and recording duration as needed Note that each session takes a long time and requires many shots Check the battery level and memory card space in advance Choose o Follow steps 1 2 in Specific Scenes Q155 and choose EA and then press the W button ser E o Press the 4 buttons or turn the di 3 dial to choose s and then press the IE button Zoom is set to maximum wide angle and cannot be adjusted 2 Configure movie settings O Press the a button O Press the a W buttons or turn the 4 dial to choose an item Choose the desired option by pressing the 4 buttons and cam gt then press the MENU button Star Time Lapse Movie Setting Effect B Shot Interval 30 sec Frame Rate Ez Shooting Time 60 min 3 Secure the camera 0 Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still 4 Check the brightness O Press the shutter button all the way down to shoot a single still image e Switch to Playback mode H4103 and check image brightness o To adjust brightness turn the exposure compensation dial and change the exposure level Check brightness again by taking anot
160. e 3 Other Shooting Modes Index 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 67 Q e For easier viewing try choosing MENU gt e tab gt Night Display gt On MH92 before shooting To make stars brighter choose MENU R430 E tab gt Star Emphasis Sharp To emphasize the bright stars in a starry sky set Star Emphasis to Soft This setting can produce eye catching shots by enlarging bright stars while de emphasizing dimmer stars To disable starlight processing select Off e Try switching to manual focus mode 1181 to more accurately specify the focal position before shooting e You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing 2 in steps 1 2 of Specific Scenes L155 touching BINA to access the setting screen touching W and then touching the same option or HN Shooting Star Trails Star Trails gt gt Still Images Streaks created by the movement of stars through the sky are recorded in a single image After determining the shutter speed and number of shots the camera shoots continuously A shooting session can last up to about two hours Check the battery level in advance Choose A o Follow steps 1 2 in Specific Scenes Q155 and choose EA and then press the V button o Press the 4 buttons or turn the dial to choose MAY and then press the
161. e For shooting movies 71 A96 You can also shoot movies when the mode dial is not set to Movie mode simply by pressing the movie button Creative Filters Mode Add a variety of effects to images when shooting R458 Adjusting the Screen Angle and Orientation You can adjust the screen angle and orientation to suit the scene or how you are shooting e Tilt the screen up to 180 upward e When including yourself in shots you can view a mirror image of yourself by rotating the screen around toward the front of the camera To cancel reverse display press the MENU button choose Reverse Disp on the tab and press the 4 buttons to choose Off When the camera is not in use keep the screen closed Be careful not to open the screen any further than this as it will damage the camera Before Use Basic Guide Camera Basics Advanced Guide 92 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix Index lt gt 5 28 Shooting Display Options Using the FUNC Menu Before Use Press the W button to view other information on the screen or to hide Configure commonly used shooting functions through the FUNC menu as Basic Guide the information For details on the information displayed see On Screen follows Information 11179 Note that menu items and opt
162. e press the shutter button halfway e To deactivate Scroll Display choose MENU 1130 D gt tab gt Scroll Display gt Off e To have the most recent shot displayed when you enter Playback mode choose MENU 1130 gt gt tab gt Resume gt Last shot e To change the transition shown between images access MENU 1130 and choose your desired effect on the tab gt Transition Effect Touch Screen Operations o To view the next image drag left across the screen and to view the previous image drag right e To access Scroll Display mode quickly drag left or right repeatedly e You can also choose images in Scroll Display mode by dragging left or right e Touching the central image will restore single image display e To browse images grouped by shooting date in Scroll Display mode drag up or down o To start movie playback touch 6 gt in step 2 of Viewing R1103 e To adjust the volume during movie playback quickly drag up or down across the screen o To stop playback touch the screen The screen at left is displayed and the camera is ready for your next operation e Touch s to display the volume panel and then touch 4 to adjust the volume At a volume of 0 ig is displayed To switch frames touch the scrollbar or drag left or right o To resume playback touch P e Touch to return to the screen in step 2 of Viewing R4103
163. e 7 Wi Fi Functions recording 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix Index 13 Image Brightness Exposure T Cannot be used with Touch Shutter 1142 AECE Basic Guide Adjusting Image Brig htness Q AE Auto Exposure Exposure Compensation e After the exposure is locked you can adjust the combination Advanced Guide gt Still I of shutter speed and aperture value by turning the dial till Images Program Shift Camera Basics The standard exposure set by the camera can be adjusted in 1 3 stop increments in a range of 3 to 3 9 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode Changing the Metering Method P 341 1547 MED 34 55 o As you watch the screen turn the exposure compensation dial to adjust brightness e The correction level you specified is now displayed gt Still Images Adjust the metering method how brightness is measured to suit shooting conditions as follows 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode o Press the button choose S in the menu and choose the desired option 129 The option you configured is now displayed Locking Image Brightness Exposure AE Lock 6 Playback Mode gt gt Still Images Before shooting you can lock the exposure or you can specify focus and exposure separately 7 Wi Fi Functions For typical shooting conditions including backlit shots Automatically adjusts exposure to match the shooting conditions 8
164. e shutter button is pressed halfway L137 e Set IS Mode to Continuous R491 e Raise the flash and set the flash mode to R488 e Increase the ISO speed 1175 e Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still In this case you should set IS Mode to Off A91 Shots are out of focus e Press the shutter button halfway to focus on subjects before pressing it all the way down to shoot L127 Make sure subjects are within focusing range H4196 Set AF assist Beam to On 11152 Confirm that unneeded functions such as macro are deactivated Try shooting with focus lock or AF lock R483 1187 Shots are blurry e Blurring may occur more often when Touch Shutter is used to shoot depending on shooting conditions Hold the camera still when shooting No AF frames are displayed and the camera does not focus when the shutter button is pressed halfway e To have AF frames displayed and the camera focus correctly try composing the shot with higher contrast subject areas centered before you press the shutter button halfway Otherwise try pressing the shutter button halfway repeatedly Subjects in shots look too dark e Raise the flash and set the flash mode to L188 e Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation H474 e Adjust contrast by using i Contrast 77 H4123 e Use AE lock or spot metering H474 R474 Subjects look too bright highlights are washed out Lower t
165. ect ratio Recording Pixels L Large 20M 5472x3648 M1 Medium 1 12M 4320x2880 M2 Medium 2 4M 2304x1536 S Small 0 3M 720x480 RAW Images Number of Shots per Memory Card Approx shots 8 GB 32 GB 3441 Compression 5568 5329 8472 17091 30040 e The values in the table are based on Canon measurement conditions and may change depending on the subject memory card and camera settings Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix Index lt gt 5 195 Recording Time per Memory Card Recording Time per Memory Card ities 32 GB ru Ma 30 min 03 sec 2 hr 01 min 27 sec ErHp EN 43 min 29 sec 2 hr 55 min 43 sec 2 hr 03 min 55 sec 8 hr 20 min 32 sec EVGA EIA 5 hr 14 min 34 sec 21 hr 10 min 38 sec 4 26 min 22 sec for iFrame movies L172 2 1 hr 46 min 33 sec for iFrame movies L172 e The values in the table are based on Canon measurement conditions and may change depending on the subject memory card and camera settings e Recording will automatically stop when the clip file size reaches 4 GB or when the recording time reaches approximately 29 minutes and 59 seconds when shooting in Eo Hp EZ or Exped or approximately 1 hour when shooting in Ev
166. ect ratio of the camera screen Same aspect ratio as 35mm film used for printing images at 5 x 7 inch or postcard sizes Used for display on standard definition televisions or similar display devices Also used for printing images at 3 5 x 5 inch or A series sizes Square aspect ratio Aspect ratio commonly used for portraits You can customize camera operation so that turning the Z ring changes the aspect ratio L197 Not available in N mode Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Index Camera Basics 92 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 48 Changing Image Resolution Size gt gt Still Images Choose from 4 levels of image resolution as follows For guidelines on how many shots at each resolution setting can fit on a memory card see Number of Shots per Memory Card 11195 o Press the 9 button choose L in the menu and choose the desired option ENS 029 e The option you configured is now displayed o To restore the original setting repeat this process but choose L Guidelines for Choosing Resolution Based on Paper Size for 3 2 Images L A2 16 5 x 23 4 in A3 A5 11 7 x 16 5 5 8 x 8 3 in M2 3 5 x 5in 5x 7 in Postcard S For e mailing and similar purposes Q e Not availa
167. ed during movie recording e If you hold the camera vertically the orientation of the electronic level will be updated automatically to match the camera orientation e Calibrate the electronic level if it seems ineffective in helping you level the camera H4155 Not available in NE mode Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Index 92 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 50 Magnifying the Area in Focus gt gt Still Images You can check the focus by pressing the shutter button halfway which will enlarge the portion of the image in focus in the AF frame 4 Configure the setting o Press the MENU button choose AF Point Zoom on the Y tab and then choose On R430 Digital Zoom Standard AF Point Zoom On Touch Shutter Off AF assist Beam On Flash Settings 2 Check the focus o Press the shutter button halfway The face detected as the main subject is now magnified o To restore the original setting choose Off in step 1 Q e The area in focus is not magnified in the following cases when the shutter button is pressed halfway If a face was not detected if the person is too close to the camera and their face is too large for the screen or if the camera detects subject movement When digital zoom is use
168. en including yourself in group photos or similar shots Choose c2J o Follow steps 1 2 in Specific Scenes R155 and choose gj and then press the VW button o Press the 4 buttons or turn the 4h dial to choose ts and then press the 9 button 2 Compose the shot and press the shutter button halfway O Make sure a green frame is displayed around the face you focus on and white frames around other faces 3 Press the shutter button all the way down e The camera now enters shooting standby mode and Look straight at camera to start count down is displayed e The lamp blinks and the self timer sound is played SA straight ar camera cae 4 Join the subjects in the shooting area and look at the camera o After the camera detects a new face the lamp blinking and self timer sound will speed up When the flash fires the lamp will remain lit About two seconds later the camera will shoot e To cancel shooting after you have triggered the self timer press the MENU button Even if your face is not detected after you join the others in the shooting area the camera will shoot about 15 seconds later To change the number of shots press the A W buttons after choosing in step 1 Blink Detection 1151 is only available for the final shot You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing E in steps 1 2 of Specific Scenes 55 touching AINA to access
169. ending Options Notes on Sending Images Before Use You can choose multiple images to send at once and change the image e Keep your fingers or other objects off the Wi Fi antenna area Basic Guide resolution size before sending Some Web services also enable you to N4 Covering this may decrease the speed of your image annotate the images you send transfers AS e Depending on the condition of the network you are using it may take Sending Multiple Images a long time to send movies Be sure to keep an eye on the camera battery level Camera Basics F e Up to 50 images can be sent together at once One movie up to five CE 1 Choose Select and send bios or are digest movie in to 13 minutes can be een 2 Tog ee Mode Y o o On the image transfer screen press the Web services may limit the number of images or length of movies you 4 buttons to choose Select and can send For details refer to the Web service you are using 3 Other Shooting Modes send and then press the button e For movies that you do not compress 125 a separate compressed file is sent instead of the original file Note that this may A P Mode delay transmission and the file cannot be sent unless there is enough space for it on the memory card 2 Choose images e When sending movies to smartphones note that the supported image o TV AV M ande Mode O Press the a W 4 buttons to choose quality varies depending on the smartphone For details refer to
170. enu Q Accessories 10 Appendix 34 4 Shoot Shooting Still Images 1 Focus o Press the shutter button halfway The camera beeps twice after focusing and AF frames are displayed to indicate image areas in focus Several AF frames are displayed when multiple areas are in focus o If Raise the flash appears on the screen move the switch to raise the flash It will fire when shooting If you prefer not to use the flash push it down with your finger into the camera 2 Shoot o Press the shutter button all the way down o As the camera shoots a shutter sound is played and in low light conditions when you have raised the flash it fires automatically Keep the camera still until the shutter sound ends o After displaying your shot the camera will revert to the shooting screen 1 Start shooting beeps once as recording begins and Rec is displayed with the elapsed O Black bars are displayed on the top and bottom edges of the screen and the subject is slightly enlarged The black bars indicate image areas not recorded o Frames displayed around any detected faces indicate that they are in focus Once recording begins take your finger off the movie button 2 Resize the subject and recompose the shot as needed o To resize the subject repeat the operations in step 3 However note that the sound of camera operations will be recorded Note that
171. era is a high precision electronic device Avoid dropping it or subjecting it to strong impact Never bring the camera near magnets motors or other devices that generate strong electromagnetic fields which may cause malfunction or erase image data If water droplets or dirt adheres to the camera or screen wipe with a dry soft cloth such as an eyeglass cloth Do not rub hard or apply force Never use cleaners containing organic solvents to clean the camera or screen Use a blower brush to remove dust from the lens If cleaning is difficult contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk To prevent condensation from forming on the camera after sudden temperature changes when the camera is transferred from cold to warm environments put the camera in an airtight resealable plastic bag and let it gradually adjust to the temperature before removing it from the bag If condensation does form on the camera stop using it immediately Continuing to use the camera in this state may damage it Remove the battery pack and memory card and wait until the moisture has evaporated before resuming use Store unused battery packs in a plastic bag or other container To maintain battery performance if you will not use the battery pack for some time charge it about once a year and use up the remaining charge before storage Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4
172. es h dial to choose Print and then press the Print from Wi Fi printer 2 C 998 ol A button 4 PM d AV a ode O E m lee nel I w114 11D buttons or turn For detailed printing instructions see the 4 dial to choose 4 and then a i press the 68 button Printing Images 11166 Tv Av M and C Mod 1i des eo To cancel the connection press the 4 a S DEI gt button choose OK on the confirmation screen either press the 4 buttons or 6 Playback Mode ES 3 Choose Add a Device turn the dB dial and then press the AA o Press the A W buttons or turn the 8 punon 7 Wi Fi Functions dial to choose Add a Device and then press the button Q e Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in 8 Setting Menu the camera mE e Once you have connected to devices via the Wi Fi menu recent ET sa destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi Fi menu 9 Accessories Waiting to connect S cameras e do You can easily connect again by pressing the A W buttons to al a tothe choose the device and then pressing the button To add a 10 Appendix access point and start app new device display the device selection screen by pressing the SSID XXXX_XXXXX_XXXX 4 gt buttons and then configure the setting e If you prefer not to display recent target devices choose MENU Index Switch Network 130 gt FT tab gt Wi Fi Settings gt Target History gt Off e To use ano
173. es to print per sheet Advanced Guide Camera Basics 92 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 168 Printing Movie Scenes gt gt Movies 4 Access the printing screen O Follow steps 1 5 in Easy Print 11166 to choose a movie and then press the button o Press the 4 buttons or turn the dk dial to choose C4 and then press the 5 button This screen is displayed N fe 1920x1080 4 2 Choose a printing method O Press the a w buttons or turn the 8 dial to choose 4 and then press the 4 buttons to choose the printing method Q 1 copies CA Single 3 Default Paper Settings B Default Print B Default MENU D 3 Print the image Movie Printing Options Prints the current scene as a still image Prints a series of scenes a certain interval apart on a single sheet of paper You can also print the folder number file number and elapsed time for the frame by setting Caption to On Sequence e To cancel printing in progress press the O button choose OK and then press the button again e ID Photo and Sequence cannot be chosen on Canon brand PictBridge compatible printers from CP720 CP730 and earlier models Adding Images to the Print List DPOF gt gt Still Images Batch
174. ext by touching the on screen keyboard When Bla is shown you can touch aig instead of pressing the button if you prefer When MIM is shown you can touch MEN instead of pressing the MENU button if you prefer To dismiss the menu press the MENU button again Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 92 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 31 On Screen Keyboard Use the on screen keyboard to enter information for Face ID L144 Wi Fi connections H4135 and so on Note that the length and type of information you can enter varies depending on the function you are using 1 Entering Characters e Touch the characters to enter them e The amount of information you can enter 1 varies depending on the function you are using Moving the Cursor o Touch m or turn the ring Entering Line Breaks e Touch Switching Input Modes e To switch to numbers or symbols touch f e Touch 4 to enter capital letters Available input modes vary depending on the function you are using Deleting Characters o To delete the previous character either touch jj or press the Tj button eo Holding down the jj button will delete five characters at a time Confirming Input and Returning to the Previous S
175. f the following measures Use the camera to perform low level formatting of the memory card 4154 Lower the image quality R450 Switch to a memory card that supports high speed recording H196 Zooming is not possible e Zooming is not possible in EA mode 1166 e Zooming is not possible when shooting movies in 187 mode L160 Subjects look distorted e Subjects that pass in front of the camera quickly may look distorted This is not a malfunction Playback Playback is not possible e Image or movie playback may not be possible if a computer is used to rename files or alter the folder structure Refer to Software Instruction Manual 4163 for details on folder structure and file names Playback stops or audio skips e Switch to a memory card that you have performed low level formatting on with the camera 11154 e There may be brief interruptions when playing movies copied to memory cards that have slow read speeds e When movies are played on a computer frames may be dropped and audio may skip if computer performance is inadequate Sound is not played during movies e Adjust the volume 4151 if you have activated Mute 1151 or the sound in the movie is faint e No sound is played for movies shot in 8 H60 or s L169 mode because audio is not recorded in these modes Memory Card The memory card is not recognized e Restart the camera with the memory card in it L126 Computer Cann
176. formation Display gt gt Still Images gt Movies DARE 100 0002 08 08 2014 10 00 00 e The RGB histogram shows the distribution of shades of red green and blue in an image The horizontal axis represents R G or B brightness and the vertical axis how much of the image is at that level of brightness Viewing this histogram enables you to check image color characteristics MAWE 100 0002 08 08 2014 10 00 00 o Using a smartphone connected to the camera via Wi Fi you can geotag images on the camera adding information such as latitude longitude and elevation 11147 You can review this information in the GPS information display O Latitude longitude elevation and UTC shooting date and time are listed from top to bottom Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode Index 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 105 O is shown instead of numerical values for items not available on your smartphone or items not recorded correctly e UTC Coordinated Universal Time essentially the same as Greenwich Mean Time e GPS information display is not available for images that lack this information e You can also switch between the RGB histogram still images only and GPS information display by dragging the lower half of the screen up
177. from which images are to be sent Once the camera is registered and the computer is ready to receive images the icon changes to F8 Sending Images Images sent from the camera are automatically saved to the computer If the computer that you intend to send images to is turned off the images will be stored temporarily on the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server Stored images are regularly erased so make sure to turn on the computer and save the images Send images o f you have already assigned El to the LJ button press the button o If you have not assigned the button this way choose l as described in steps 1 2 in Uploading Images to Web Services 141 Once the connection is established the images are sent When the images have been sent successfully to the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server El is displayed on the screen 2 Save the images to the computer Images are automatically saved to the computer when you turn it on Images are automatically sent to Web services from the CANON iMAGE GATEWAY server even if the computer is off e When sending images you should use a fully charged battery pack or an AC adapter kit sold separately R4159 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode Wi Fi Functions Index 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10
178. fter detecting a wink by the person whose face is inside the frame e To cancel shooting after you have triggered the self timer press the IMENU button If the wink is not detected wink again slowly and deliberately e Winking may not be detected if eyes are obscured by hair a hat or glasses Closing and opening both eyes at once will also be detected as a wink If winking is not detected the camera will shoot about 15 seconds later To change the number of shots press the A W buttons after choosing X in step 1 Blink Detection 451 is only available for the final shot If no one is in the shooting area when the shutter button is pressed all the way down the camera will shoot after a person enters the shooting area and winks You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing E in steps 1 2 of Specific Scenes 55 touching AINA to access the setting screen touching C and then touching the same option or K Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes Index 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 64 Using the Face Self Timer gt Still Images The camera will shoot about two seconds after detecting that the face of another person such as the photographer has entered the shooting area 1184 This is useful wh
179. g smiling or sleeping people smiling or sleeping babies moving children and other moving subjects Icons are not displayed for smiling or sleeping bo and moving children in drive mode other than 411 L139 1143 and when Hg Lamp Corr is set to On and scenes are automatically corrected Lao Backlit icons are not displayed for moving children and smiling people when the flash is set to Icons for babies including smiling and sleeping babies and moving children are displayed when Face ID is set to On and faces of registered babies less than two years old or children 2 12 years old are detected 1144 Confirm beforehand that the date and time are correct L1120 Try shooting in P mode 173 if the scene icon does not match actual shooting conditions or if it is not possible to shoot with your expected effect color or brightness Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Index Camera Basics 92 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 38 Continuous Shooting Scenes If you shoot a still image when the following scene icons are displayed the camera will shoot continuously If you press the shutter button halfway when one of the icons in the table below is displayed one of the following icons will be displayed to inform you that the came
180. g Effects a sisancnccaicesncsnasathecosunessannneseninmeesiadegeidnpacsesemsaxseet 55 Specific SCON8S ccooccccocnncconcnccoononononononnnnconnncnnnnncnnnnnonnnnconannnos 55 Using Functions for Underwater ShofS cooonccccccccccnncccconnnnss 57 Shooting with an Underwater Focusing Range coooccccccn 57 Correcting White Balance oocccooocncccccnnncconnnnnnanonenanoss 57 Image Effects Creative FilterS cocoonccccccccnnncocononncnnos 58 Shooting High Contrast Scenes High Dynamic Range 58 Adding Artistic ENSCS vesical ii 59 Shooting with Faded Colors Nostalgic oooccoooommommmmmo o 59 Shooting with a Fish Eye Lens Effect Fish Eye Effect 60 Shots Resembling Miniature Models Miniature Effect 60 Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time Tor One Minute CUPOS assi 61 Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect Toy Camera Effect 61 Making Subjects Stand Out Background Defocus 62 Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect cccccuninnncnnccnccnnccccoononnnnnnos 62 Shooting in MONOCHTOME cccicecnicinidininccn tic cdi s dcaa 63 Special Modes for Other Purposes cccccccocccncccoccnccncncnnnonononos 63 Auto Shooting after Face Detection Smart Shutter 63 Auto Shooting after Smile Detection cc oo omoncnnnnnos 63 Using the Wink SelETIMEF vaiiisicensavaceiciincnudpionsavcoonanaiieednuvonad 6
181. h the shutter button pressed halfway press the RNG button o The flash fires and when is displayed the flash output level is retained e To unlock FE release the shutter button and press the Fe button again In this case 4 is no longer displayed lt 3 Compose the shot and shoot o After one shot FE is unlocked and E is no longer displayed FE Lock cannot be used with Touch Shutter L142 or Touch AF 1186 because touching the screen will cancel FE Lock Q e FE Flash Exposure Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode Index 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 89 Changing the Flash Timing Shooting RAW Images Before Use gt gt Still Images gt gt Still Images Basic Guide Change the timing of the flash and shutter release as follows RAW images are raw unprocessed data recorded with essentially no loss of image quality from the camera s internal image processing Use Advanced Guide da il Access the setting screen Digital Photo Professional 111163 to adjust RAW images as desired da alsin ia o Press the MENU button choose Flash with minimal loss of image quality ic e Shutter Sync Ja amera asics Red Eye Lamp Settings on the EN tab and then press o Press the 49 button
182. halfway 127 The lens will be retracted after about one minute once the camera is in Playback mode You can turn the camera off when the lens is retracted by pressing the gt button 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix Index 26 Power Saving Features Auto Power Down As a way to conserve battery power the camera automatically deactivates the screen Display Off and then turns itself off after a specific period of inactivity Power Saving in Shooting Mode The screen is automatically deactivated after about one minute of inactivity In about two more minutes the lens is retracted and the camera turns itself off To activate the screen and prepare for shooting when the screen is off but the lens is still out press the shutter button halfway 27 Power Saving in Playback Mode The camera turns itself off automatically after about five minutes of inactivity e You can deactivate Auto Power Down and adjust the timing of Display Off if you prefer 153 e Power saving is not active while the camera is connected to other devices via Wi Fi 127 or when connected to a computer 01164 Shutter Button To ensure your shots are in focus always begin by holding the shutter button halfway down and once the subject is in focus press the button all the way down to shoot In this manual shutter button operations are described as pressing the button halfway or all the way down
183. he camera press the power MENU Reiser ATAR button 7 Wi Fi Functions Q e Date time settings can be retained for about 3 weeks by the camera s built in date time battery backup battery after the 8 Setting Menu 1 Unless you set the date time and home time zone the Date battery pack is removed Time screen will be displayed each time you turn the camera on e The date time battery will be charged in about 4 hours once you ones Specify the correct information insert a charged battery pack or connect the camera to an AC adapter kit sold separately 159 even if the camera is left off 10 Appendix G e To set daylight saving time 1 hour ahead choose 4 in step 2 e Once the date time battery is depleted the Date Time screen will and then choose 8 by pressing the 4 W buttons or turning be displayed when you turn the camera on Set the correct date index the SB dial and time as described in Setting the Date and Time 11120 e You can also set the date and time by touching the desired option on the screen in step 2 and then touching A W followed by SA Similarly you can also set your home time zone by A gt 4 touching q P on the screen in step 3 followed by KAN 21 Display Language Change the display language as needed Enter Playback mode o Press the button CO y 2 Access the setting screen o Press and hold the button and then immediately press the MENU button
184. he desired option 1130 One AF frame is displayed Effective for reliable focusing You can also 5 Tv Av M and C Mode move the frame by touching the screen L086 Digital Zo 1 6x e The view is enlarged and the zoom factor Servo AF is displayed on the screen 6 Playback Mode 1 A yellow AF frame is displayed with QJ if the camera cannot focus when you press the shutter button halfway 7 Wi Fi Functions 1 The digital tele converter cannot be used with digital zoom 40 or AF point zoom L051 G To compose shots so that subjects are positioned at the edge or 8 Setting Menu in a corner first aim the camera to capture the subject in an AF frame and then hold the shutter button halfway down As you Q Accessories continue to hold the shutter button halfway recompose the shot as desired and then press the shutter button all the way down Focus Lock e The AF frame position is enlarged when you press the shutter button halfway and AF Point Zoom H51 is set to On Index Q e The shutter speed may be equivalent when you move the zoom lever all the way toward L for maximum telephoto and when you zoom in to enlarge the subject to the same size following step 2 in Zooming In Closer on Subjects Digital Zoom 440 10 Appendix lt gt 5 83 Moving and Resizing AF Frames 1 point gt gt Still Images When you want to change the position or size of the AF frame set the AF frame mode to 1 p
185. he flash and set the flash mode to 1134 e Adjust brightness by using exposure compensation H474 e Use AE lock or spot metering 1174 0174 e Reduce the lighting on subjects Shots look too dark despite the flash firing 137 e Shoot within flash range 4196 e Adjust brightness by using flash exposure compensation or changing the flash output level L189 1195 e Increase the ISO speed 1175 Subjects in flash shots look too bright highlights are washed out e Shoot within flash range 4196 Lower the flash and set the flash mode to 1134 e Adjust brightness by using flash exposure compensation or changing the flash output level N89 1195 White spots appear in flash shots e This is caused by light from the flash reflecting off dust or airborne particles Shots look grainy e Lower the ISO speed 475 e High ISO speeds in some shooting modes may cause grainy images H455 Subjects are affected by red eye e Set Red Eye Lamp to On L152 The red eye reduction lamp H44 will be activated in flash shots For best results have subjects look at the red eye reduction lamp Also try increasing the lighting in indoor scenes and shooting at closer range e Edit images using red eye correction 1 1123 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi
186. he scene and image stabilization mode are displayed in the upper left of the screen Frames displayed around any detected subjects indicate that they are in focus 3 Compose the shot e To zoom in and enlarge the subject move the zoom lever toward telephoto and to zoom away from the subject move it toward 444 wide angle Before Use Advanced Guide Index Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 22 4 Shoot Shooting Still Images 1 Focus o Press the shutter button lightly halfway down The camera beeps twice after focusing and AF frames are displayed to indicate image areas in focus o f Raise the flash appears on the screen move the switch to raise the flash It will fire when shooting If you prefer not to use the flash push it down with your finger into the camera 2 Shoot o Press the shutter button all the way down o As the camera shoots a shutter sound is played and in low light conditions when you have raised the flash it fires automatically Keep the camera still until the shutter sound ends o After displaying your shot the camera will revert to the shooting screen Shooting Movies 1 Start shooting o Press the movie button The camera beeps once as recording begins
187. hen using the camera over extended periods or when connecting the camera to a printer or computer Cannot be used to charge the battery pack in the camera f 1 e The battery charger and AC adapter kit can be used in areas with 100 240 V AC power 50 60 Hz For power outlets in a different format use a commercially available adapter for the plug Never use an electrical transformer designed for traveling which may damage the battery pack Flash Unit High Power Flash HF DC2 o External flash for illuminating subjects that are out of range of the built in flash High Power Flash units cannot be used in Vf LAV or Tv shooting mode when Flash Mode is set to Manual Other Accessories Waterproof Case WP DC54 e For underwater photography at depths of up to 40 meters 130 ft Also useful for shooting in the rain at the beach or on ski slopes Interface Cable IFC 400PCU For connecting the camera to a computer or printer Stereo AV Cable AVC DC400ST Connect the camera to a TV to enjoy playback on the larger TV screen e Printers Canon Brand PictBridge Compatible Printers o Even without using a computer you can print images by connecting the camera directly to a printer For details visit your nearest Canon retailer 0 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 92 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av
188. her Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories Index 10 Appendix lt gt 5 172 Appendix Helpful information when using the camera Troubleshooting If you think there is a problem with the camera first check the following If the items below do not solve your problem contact a Canon Customer Support Help Desk Power Nothing happens when the power button is pressed Confirm that the battery pack is charged 19 Confirm that the battery pack is inserted facing the correct way H419 Confirm that the memory card battery cover is fully closed 119 Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance Try cleaning the terminals with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times The battery pack runs out of power quickly Battery performance decreases at low temperatures Try warming the battery pack a little by putting it in your pocket for example ensuring that the terminals do not touch any metal objects Dirty battery terminals reduce battery performance Try cleaning the terminals with a cotton swab and reinserting the battery pack a few times If these measures do not help and the battery pack still runs out of power soon after charging it has reached the end of its life Purchase a new battery pack The lens is not retracted Do not open the memory card battery cover while the camera is on Close the cover turn the
189. her or at twilight Tungsten For shooting under ordinary incandescent lighting 8 Setting Menu For shooting under white fluorescent lighting wy Q Accessories mj Fluorescent H For shooting under daylight fluorescent lighting Flash For shooting with the flash 10 Appendix l Underwater For shooting underwater 0155 Index a Custom For manually setting a custom white balance j 79 lt gt 5 78 Custom White Balance gt gt Still Images gt Movies For image colors that look natural under the light in your shot adjust white balance to suit the light source where you are shooting Set the white balance under the same light source that will illuminate your shot O Follow the steps in Adjusting White Balance 1 178 to choose 5 or 483 i o Aim the camera at a plain white subject aa so that the entire screen is white Press OB 0 0 the PNG button El 1 bm ot o The tint of the screen changes once the white balance data has been recorded EGS Evaluate White Bal e Colors may look unnatural if you change camera settings after recording white balance data ni 6 e You can also record white balance data on the screen above by touching ER Manually Correcting White Balance gt gt Still Images gt Movies You can correct white balance This adjustment can match the effect of using a commercially available color temperature conversion filter or color compensating filter
190. her shot Effect a a A 15 sec 30 sec Choose the interval between Shot Interval 1min each shot Framerate TG 60 min Shooting Time 120 min Unlimited Estimated playback time based on shooting interval and frame rate for a one hour session Interval between Shots Playback Time 5 Shoot Before Use O Press the movie button Busy is displayed briefly and then shooting begins Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Do not disturb the camera while shooting e To cancel shooting press the movie button again Note that cancellation may take up to about 60 seconds e The camera operates in Eco mode Auto Mode 153 while shooting 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Other Shooting Modes as star trails 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode Choose the movie frame rate Choose the length of the recording session To record until the battery runs out choose Unlimited 6 Playback Mode 90 min 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix There will be a delay before you can shoot again as the camera processes the images If the camera runs out of battery power or memory card space shooting stops and a movie created from the images up to that point is saved A shooting interval of 1 min is not available with these effects 31 21 ei or ea Sound is not recorded For easier viewing try choosing MENU gt e tab gt Night Display gt
191. idate images Setti etting Menu Auto Playback of Related Images Smart Shuffle _ e For full screen display of the center image in step 2 touch that 8 3 gt Still Images image To restore the original display touch the screen again O Accessories Based on the current image the camera offers four images that you may wish to view After you choose to view one of those images the camera 10 Appendix offers four more images This is an enjoyable way to play back images in an unexpected order Try this feature after you have taken many shots in many kinds of scenes Index po fT q Choose Smart Shuffle image Search o Press the MENU button choose Smart List Play Digest Movies ere er Shuffle on the gt tab and then press Slideshow the E button 430 d gt 4 Erase Four candidate images are displayed 113 Protecting Images gt gt Still Images gt Movies Protect important images to prevent accidental erasure by the camera 116 Choosing a Selection Method Access the setting screen o Press the MENU button and choose Protect on the tab R430 G 5 YT List Play Digest Movies Smart Shuffle Slideshow Erase Protect EN 2 Choose a selection method Select Select Range e Choose a menu item and an option as desired H30 e To return to the menu screen press the IMENU button Protect All Images Unprotect All Images 1 P
192. ie shooting is not available Any jerky subject motion shown on the smartphone due to the connection environment will not affect recorded images No AF frames are displayed Capture a test image to check the focus Captured images are not transferred to the smartphone Use the smartphone to browse and import images from the camera Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode Wi Fi Functions Index 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 148 Editing or Erasing Wi Fi Settings Edit or erase Wi Fi settings as follows Editing Connection Information Access the Wi Fi menu and choose the device to edit Connect to computer O Press the P gt button to turn the camera on MEN gt gt O Press the 4 button o Press the a W 4 buttons or turn the 4 dial to choose the icon of the device to edit and then press the button 2 Choose Edit a Device Add a Device a O Press the a w buttons or turn the di MARTE dial to choose Edit a Device and then My PC press the 69 button Select a Device venus 3 Choose a device to edit Edit a Device Windows O Press the A w buttons or turn the dh dial to choose the device to edit and then press the button 4 Choose an item to edit o Press the a wW buttons or
193. inccntsnehessratsaaesinaudaedbnestsionl 22 Trying the Camera Ob ansiada 22 Shooting Smart Auto aaa 22 VIEWING eree e eee ease 24 Touch Screen OperatiONS ocoonoconcnnnccnccconcccononcconononanananononnns 24 e o taaxtcoalaatentes 25 Advanced Guide 1 Camera BASICOS iscciciciincsoacninnacinnaann ares ncn daran cidade 26 A EE E A A E E E erent er en eee ree 26 Power Saving Features Auto Power Down ccccccsseseeeeeees 27 Power Saving in Shooting Mode cccccccccoconocccconcccnncnnnncnnnnnnos 27 Power Saving in Playback MOdGe c cccceeeessseseeeeeeeeeeeeas 27 Shuker BUON iio 27 Shooting MOGES ssusnzianca rr eds 28 Adjusting the Screen Angle and Orientation oo o 28 Shooting Display Options 2cccccccsderesncqatocssendocsresenansneiocnstvensenss 29 Using the FUNC Menu cccccicceccccectessecscedeneteverscreancededancxondeneosd 29 Using Touch Screen Operations to Configure Settings 30 Using the Menu SC mision 30 Touch Screen Opera sn 31 On Screen KeyboOard cccccsssssceeececeessseeeeceeesseeeeeseeneseeeeeess 32 indicator DISplay arena cetonas eens etdetnda ence niente emranenns 32 IOR APR a nscepns E E e 33 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode cccccessseseesseees 34 Shooting with Camera Determined Settings 34 Shooting Smart Auto sust iaa 34 Shooting in Hybrid Auto Mode oooccccccccccooococnccnnnnnncccnnncnnnnnnos 36 Digest Movie P
194. ing step 2 in Choosing a Selection Method 4114 choose Protect All Images and press the 9 button 2 Protect the images o Press the 4 buttons or turn the dB dial to choose OK and then press the 9 button Protect All Images Clearing All Protection at Once You can clear protection from all images at once To clear protection choose Unprotect All Images in step 1 of Protecting All Images at Once and then complete step 2 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode Index 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 115 Erasing Images gt gt Still Images gt Movies You can choose and erase unneeded images one by one Be careful when erasing images because they cannot be recovered However protected images 111114 cannot be erased Choose an image to erase o Press the 4 buttons or turn the 4 dial to choose an image 2 Erase the image o Press the Tp button o After Erase is displayed press the 4 buttons or turn the dial to choose Erase and then press the 6 button Cancel o The current image is now erased o To cancel erasure press the 4 buttons or turn the dial to choose Cancel and then press the button e Pressing the button while a
195. ion may vary slightly from the color of images shot using My Colors L180 e You can also configure this setting by touching an option to select it on the screen in step 3 and then touching it again Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode Index 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 122 Correcting Image Brightness i Contrast gt gt Still Images Excessively dark image areas such as faces or backgrounds can be detected and automatically adjusted to the optimal brightness Insufficient overall image contrast is also automatically corrected to make subjects stand out better Choose from four correction levels and then save the image as a separate file 4 Choose i Contrast o Press the MENU button and then choose i Contrast on the P gt tab Photobook Set up 130 i Contrast 2 Choose an image o Press the gt buttons or turn the dial to choose an image and then press the button 3 Choose an option o Press the gt buttons or turn the dial to choose an option and then press the 3 button 4 Save as a new image and review O Follow steps 4 5 in Resizing Images 1120 1 For some images correction may be inaccurate or may cause images to appear grainy e
196. ions vary depending on the shooting mode Advanced Guide 183 UE DEE i 3 1 REESE FANE MEHU Camera Basics O Press the button 92 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 2 Choose a menu item 3 Other Shooting Modes O Press the a w buttons to choose a menu item 1 4 P Mode O Available options 2 are shown at the bottom of the screen 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 3 Choose an option 7 Wi Fi Functions Pr h ttons or turn th Q e Screen brightness is automatically increased by the night view ae the tal a e 8 8 Setting Menu function when you are shooting under low light making it easier 3 e Options labeled with a MAM icon can be to check how shots are composed However on screen image brightness may not match the brightness of your shots Note that conngured by pressing the M ENUI button 9 Accessories any on screen image distortion or jerky subject motion will not o Options labeled with a ERE icon can be affect recorded images configured by pressing the fonc button 10 Appendix e For playback display options see Switching Display Modes 4 Finish the setup process o Press the button Index o The screen before you pressed the 9 button in step 1 is displayed again showing the option you configured 4105 e To undo any accidental setting changes you can restore the gt 4 camera s default settings H4157 29 Using Touch Screen Operations to Configure Using
197. is function is only available for the final shot Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 82 Changing the AF Frame Mode Before Use ni gt e To access the screen in step 2 you can either touch Ae on the screen in step 1 or touch ANY on the manual focus screen gt Still Images gt Movies C0181 Basic Guide e You can also configure this setting by touching or dragging the bar Change the AF auto focus frame mode to suit the shooting conditions as i j ing RING follows on the screen in step 2 to specify a value and then touching Func anced Guide elit x o Press the MENU button choose AF Arme Frame on the g tab and then choose l Digital Tele Converter AF Frame Size Normal the desired option 430 1 Camera Basics M Digital Zoom Standard gt gt Still Images gt Movies y ol Hybrid Auto Mode The focal length of the lens can be increased by approximately 1 6x or 2 0x This can reduce camera shake because the shutter speed is faster 3 Other Shooting Modes than it would be if you zoomed including using digital zoom in to the same zoom factor A a kia o Press the MENU button choose gt gt Still Images P gt Movies POT Digital Zoom on the fy tab and then choose t
198. ished between the camera and computer Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode Wi Fi Functions Index 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 136 11 Import images e Click Import Images from Camera and then click Import Untransferred Images O Images are now saved to the Pictures folder on the computer in separate folders named by date Click OK in the screen that is displayed after image import is complete For instructions on viewing images on a computer refer to Software Instruction Manual 01163 Once you have connected to devices via the Wi Fi menu recent destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi Fi menu You can easily connect again by pressing the A W buttons to choose the device and then pressing the button To add a new device display the device selection screen by pressing the 4 buttons and then configure the setting If you prefer not to display recent target devices choose MENU 130 fT tab gt Wi Fi Settings gt Target History gt Off A message is displayed if the nickname you enter begins with a symbol or space Press the 69 button and enter a different nickname When the camera is connected to a computer the camera screen is blank Mac OS If CameraWindow is not displayed
199. isplayed The setting screen cannot be accessed by pressing the DP button when the flash is lowered Move the switch to raise the flash then configure the setting Auto Fires automatically in low light conditions On Fires for each shot Slow Synchro Fires to illuminate the main subject such as people while shooting at a slower shutter speed to illuminate backgrounds out of flash range measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake Additionally you should set IS Mode to Off when using a tripod or other means to secure the camera H491 In 43 mode even after the flash fires ensure that the main subject does not move until the shutter sound is finished playing O e In 143 mode mount the camera on a tripod or take other Off For shooting without the flash 1 e Ifa blinking I8 icon is displayed when you press the shutter button halfway in camera shake inducing low light conditions mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still Nl gt Adjustment is also possible by pressing the gt button touching the desired option and then touching it again Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode Index 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 88 Adjusting the Flash Exposure Compensatio
200. ividually 110 and ungrouped H4110 e Protecting 1 1114 a grouped image will protect all images in the group e Grouped images can be viewed individually when played back using Image Search 107 or Smart Shuffle L113 In this case images are temporarily ungrouped e The following actions are not available for grouped images editing Face ID information 4111 magnifying 1112 tagging as favorites 111118 editing H4120 printing 166 setting up individual image printing 121170 or adding to a photobook 1171 To do these things either view grouped images individually H4110 or cancel grouping 1110 first Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Index Camera Basics 92 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 43 Using Face ID If you register a person ahead of time the camera will detect that person s face and prioritize focus brightness and color for that person when shooting In AUTO mode the camera can detect babies and children based on registered birthdays and optimize settings for them when shooting This function is also useful when searching for a specific registered person among a large number of images 111108 Personal Information e Information such as images of a face face info registered with Face ID and personal inform
201. layback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 33 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode Convenient mode for easy shots with greater control over shooting Shooting with Camera Determined Settings For fully automatic selection of the optimal settings for specific scenes simply let the camera determine the subject and shooting conditions Shooting Smart Auto pz AL 1547 SAD Bp 34 55 M 3 as gt gt Still Images gt Movies Turn the camera on Press the power button The startup screen is displayed 2 Enter AUTO mode Set the mode dial to AUTO Aim the camera at the subject The camera will make a slight clicking noise as it determines the scene Icons representing the scene and image stabilization mode are displayed in the upper left of the screen L138 1139 Frames displayed around any detected subjects indicate that they are in focus Compose the shot To zoom in and enlarge the subject move the zoom lever toward telephoto and to zoom away from the subject move it toward W4 wide angle A zoom bar 1 showing the zoom position is displayed along with the area in focus 2 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Index Camera Basics 92 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting M
202. layback oscinida ao 36 Still Images Movies csi 36 A AP E E E EES 37 MOVOS cinerem nea E E I E 37 A 38 Continuous Shooting SCenes oncccccccnnonicnionnonccnnnnnconncnnnnana 39 Image Stabilization ICONS siii 39 On Screen FraMeS ccccccconnnoconnnononoconancnnnnonononnnnnnnnnnnnnocnnnanannnnnnos 40 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Index Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 Common Convenient Features occoccoccnnccncnncnncnnnoncnnncnannnannns 40 Zooming In Closer on Subjects Digital Zoom 40 Shooting at Preset Focal Lengths Step Zoom 0ooccccccccnccncncc 41 Using the Self TimMer iii idea 41 Using the Self Timer to Avoid Camera Shake 42 Customizing the Self Timer ooocccncccinccconnccnnnnnconononanccnnnnnnnos 42 Shooting by Touching the Screen Touch Shutter 42 Continuous Shooting cesnciods rain cirrosis atan 43 Image Display during Playback oocccccccocccccccnncccnnnnnnancnnos 43 Using Face ID sesine eea oca 44 Personal Information succi n dic 44 Registering Face ID InformatioN ooooccccccnncccooncncnnnnnononnnos 44 o 45 Checking and Editing Registered Information 46 Overwriting and Adding Face Information
203. ling Precautions sie p 55 caine radianes 193 eo e iio y eect ene ee ee o A 194 7 Wi Fi Functions Camera SPCCHICATIONS cc csecensucescnnrescdensacuninensdmecduideecnnascnnctaaianxs 194 UN ele EEEE EE E N EE E A ET 194 8 Setting Menu Digital Zoom Focal Length 35mm equivalent 194 Number of Shots Recording Time Playback Time 195 O Accessories Number of Shots per Memory Card cccooccccnnncccccccnaccnnnns 195 Recording Time per Memory Card incisiones 196 10 Appendix Flash Range csere reee aaee EE EERTE ETE 196 NOOR RINGE ssrin 196 Index Continuous Shooting Speed icccconnionirciaianicacciicrinod s 196 Shutter Speed ses rieles 197 AP o EEE EAER 197 Battery Pack NB 19L soria sansiseneeasectantunnaxenstaxsatnceves cde 197 Battery Charger CB 2LH CB 2LHE cccsssccccssscecesssesessseeeee 197 gt 4 o racine eect A rr A 198 12 Common Camera Operations Y Shoot e Use camera determined settings Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 1134 36 e See several effects applied to each shot using camera determined settings Creative Shot Mode 1154 Shooting people well Portraits 455 Matching specific scenes k Night Scenes Under Water 055 A55 Against Snow 55 siya as ue Fireworks Starry Skies 155 166 Applying special effects A a Vivid Colors Poster Effect 58 158 T ES Fish Eye Effect Miniature Effect LL 60 H60 Background Defo
204. ll Images Edges of subjects in focus are displayed in color to make manual focusing easier You can adjust the colors and the sensitivity level of edge detection as needed PA Access the setting screen ereng 2n o Press the MENU button choose MF Level High E Peaking Settings on the BY tab and then choose On H430 2 Configure the setting Choose a menu item to configure and then choose the desired option H430 Q Colors displayed for MF peaking are not recorded in your shots Focus Bracketing Focus BKT Mode gt Still Images Three consecutive images are captured each time you shoot with the first one at the focal distance you set manually and the others at farther and nearer focal positions determined by presets The distance from your specified focus can be set in three levels Choose ZA o Press the 9 button choose KH in the menu and then choose ZR L129 2 Configure the setting O Press the 2 button and then adjust the setting by pressing the 4 buttons or turning the dB dial 1 Focus bracketing is only available in 43 mode R488 Continuous shooting 1187 is not available in this mode G e You can also access the setting screen in step 2 by pressing the MENU button in step 2 of Shooting in Manual Focus Mode 181 e Three shots are taken regardless of any quantity specified in INC 42 e In Blink Detection mode 1151 th
205. martphone This 6 Playback Mode connection may damage the devices Depending on the smartphone the devices may not recognize Aree Wi Fi Functions 5 Start CameraWindow each other immediately In this case try holding the devices 7 e For an NFC compatible Android together in slightly different positions smartphone OS version 4 0 or later Do not place other objects between the camera and 8 Setting Menu activating NFC and touching the smartphone Also note that camera or smartphone covers or smartphone against the camera s N Mark similar accessories may block communication O Accessories will start CameraWindow on the smartphone 10 Appendix O For other smartphones start CameraWindow on the smartphone ay naex o After the camera recognizes the smartphone a device selection screen is displayed lt gt 5 129 Connections require that a memory card be in the camera e A message is displayed if the nickname you enter begins with a symbol or space Press the 9 button and enter a different nickname For better security you can display a password on the screen in step 3 by accessing MENU 1130 and choosing ff tab gt Wi Fi Settings gt Password On In this case in the password field on the smartphone in step 4 enter the password displayed on the camera One smartphone can be registered to the L button To assign a different one first clear the current one in MENU H430 gt YT tab gt
206. me time as follows o Follow the steps in Setting Copyright Information to Record in Images 111156 and choose Delete Copyright Info O Press the gt buttons or turn the db dial to choose OK and then press the 9 button Delete Copyright Info Delete copyright information Cancel Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 92 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Index Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 156 Q e The copyright info already recorded in images will not be deleted Checking Certification Logos Some logos for certification requirements met by the camera can be viewed on the screen Other certification logos are printed in this guide on the camera packaging or on the camera body e Choose Certification Logo Display and then press the button O E Touch Response Standard Wi Fi Settings Mobile Device Connect Button Copyright Info Certification Logo Display Display Language Change the display language as needed Choose Language 5 and then press the 9 button o Press the a W 4 buttons or turn the 4 dial to choose a language and then press the button English Norsk Romana Deutsch Svenska Turkce Francais Espa ol duo Nederlands EMnvix nen lve Dansk Pycckmh isa Portug
207. n gt gt Still Images Just as with regular exposure compensation H474 you can adjust the flash exposure from 2 to 2 stops in 1 3 stop increments O Raise the flash press the gt button and immediately turn the ring to choose the compensation level and then press i the 6 button ay ws e The correction level you specified is now mea UL displayed G e When there is a risk of overexposure the camera automatically adjusts the shutter speed or aperture value during the flash shots to reduce washed out highlights and shoot at optimal exposure However you can deactivate automatic adjustment of the shutter speed and aperture value by accessing MENU L130 and choosing 0 tab gt Flash Settings Safety FE Off e You can also configure the flash exposure compensation by accessing MENU 130 and choosing AY tab gt Flash Settings Flash Exp Comp e You can also access the Flash Settings MENU screen H430 when the flash is up by pressing the button and immediately pressing the MENU button A e You can also access the Flash Settings MENU screen H430 by pressing the P button and touching MEM Shooting with the FE Lock gt gt Still Images Just as with the AE lock L174 you can lock the exposure for the flash shots Raise the flash and set it to 4 88 2 Lock the flash exposure o Aim the camera at the subject to shoot with the exposure locked Wit
208. n com cig to visit CANON IMAGE GATEWAY Once the login screen is displayed enter your user name and password to log in If you do not have a CANON IMAGE GATEWAY account follow the instructions to complete member registration free of charge 2 Choose the type of camera e On this camera model dh is displayed in the Wi Fi menu o Once you choose dh a page is displayed for entering the authentication code On this page in step 7 you will enter the authentication code displayed on the camera after steps 3 6 aa 3 Access the Wi Fi menu o Press the gt button to turn the camera on O Press the a button o When the Device Nickname screen is displayed press the button Use the keyboard displayed to enter a nickname R132 On the Device Nickname screen choose OK either press the A W buttons or turn the 4B dial and then press the button Device Nickname Enter a nickname for this camera 4 Choose b o Press the a W 4 buttons or turn the 4B dial to choose dh and then press the 69 button Upload to Web service aL De El menu ES 5 Choose Authenticate o Press the 4 buttons or turn the db dial to choose Authenticate and then press the button Camera Web Link Settings On a device with a Web browser visit below URL for Camera Web Link Settings pages follow the prompts amp select Authenticate http
209. n to access CameraWindow O Press the button to turn the camera on o Mac OS CameraWindow is displayed when a connection is established between the camera and computer a o Windows Follow the steps introduced Veh below o In the screen that displays click the ln link to modify the program Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories Index 10 Appendix lt gt 5 164 Canon oom Choose Downloads Images From Canon Change program Camera and then click OK You cen change the program to use for this task sr Import pictures and videos e Double click ll 3 Save the images to the computer e Click Import Images from Camera and then click Import Untransferred Images O Images are now saved to the Pictures folder on the computer in separate folders named by date o After images are saved close CameraWindow press the button to turn the camera off and unplug the cable O For instructions on viewing images on a computer refer to Software Instruction Manual 01163 Windows 7 If the screen in step 2 is not displayed click the ra icon in the taskbar Mac OS If CameraWindow is not displayed after step 2 click the CameraWindow icon in the Dock Although you
210. ndix lt gt 5 14 Safety Precautions e Before using the product ensure that you read the safety precautions described below Always ensure that the product is used correctly e The safety precautions noted here are intended to prevent you and other persons from being injured or incurring property damage e Be sure to also check the guides included with any separately sold accessories you use x Denotes the possibility of serious injury or death e Do not trigger the flash in close proximity to people s eyes Exposure to the intense light produced by the flash could damage eyesight In particular remain at least 1 meter 3 3 feet away from infants when using the flash e Store this equipment out of the reach of children and infants A strap wound around a child s neck may result in asphyxiation If your product uses a power cord mistakenly winding the cord around a child s neck may result in asphyxiation e Use only recommended power sources e Do not disassemble alter or apply heat to the product e Do not peel off the label if the battery pack has one e Avoid dropping or subjecting the product to severe impacts e Do not touch the interior of the product if it is broken such as when dropped e Stop using the product immediately if it emits smoke or a strange smell or otherwise behaves abnormally e Do not use organic solvents such as alcohol benzine or thinner to clean the product e Avoid contact
211. nfigured in MENU 1130 PP tab gt Wi Fi Settings gt Resize for Sending Adding Comments Using the camera you can add comments to images that you send to e mail addresses social networking services etc The number of characters and symbols that can be entered may differ depending on the Web service E Access the screen for adding comments eN o On the image transfer screen choose PR E by pressing the a W 4 buttons A mM and then press the button Select and send Send this image 2 Add a comment 11132 3 Send the image G e When a comment is not entered the comment set in CANON IMAGE GATEWAY is automatically sent e You can also annotate multiple images before sending them The same comment is added to all images sent together Sending Images Automatically Image Sync Images on the memory card that have not been transferred already can be sent to a computer or Web services via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY Note that images cannot be sent only to Web services Initial Preparations Preparing the Camera Register El as the destination You can also assign El to the L button so that you can simply press the L button to send any unsent images on the memory card to a computer via CANON iMAGE GATEWAY La Add E as a destination e Add El as a destination as described in Registering CANON MAGE GATEWAY H139 e To choose a Web service as the destination follow
212. ng Portraits Portrait gt gt Still Images gt Movies Take shots of people with a softening effect Shooting Evening Scenes without Using a Tripod Handheld NightScene gt gt Still Images Beautiful shots of evening scenes or portraits with evening scenery in the Index background without the need to hold the camera very still as with a tripod o A single image is created by combining consecutive shots reducing camera shake and image noise Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 y Shooting Underwater Underwater gt gt Still Images gt Movies o Natural colored shots of sea life and underwater scenery when you use an optional waterproof case 111160 e This mode can correct white balance and match the effect of using a commercially available color compensating filter 157 8 Shooting with Snowy Backgrounds Snow gt gt Still Images gt Movies o Bright natural colored shots of people against snowy backgrounds gt gt Still Images gt Movies o Vivid shots of fireworks Subjects appear larger in Pll mode compared to other modes In Pl and hd mode shots may look grainy because the ISO speed L175 is increased to suit the shooting conditions Because the camera will shoot
213. ng may not be possible when subjects are too small or move too rapidly or when there is inadequate contrast between subjects and the background Even if you are shooting in Y mode 181 the camera will revert to A mode if you touch the screen to specify where to focus e If Face ID is set to On names will not display when registered people are detected but the names will be recorded in the still images L144 However a name will display if the subject chosen to focus on is the same as a person detected with Face ID Shooting with the AF Lock gt gt Still Images The focus can be locked After you lock the focus the focal position will not change even when you release your finger from the shutter button Lock the focus e With the shutter button pressed halfway press the q button o The focus is now locked and MF and the MF indicator are displayed q By e To unlock the focus hold the shutter button halfway down and press the q button again 2 Compose the shot and shoot 1 Cannot be used with Touch Shutter 442 Shooting Continuously as the Camera Keeps the Subject in Focus gt gt Still Images Shoot continuously as the camera keeps the subject in focus For details on the continuous shooting speed see Continuous Shooting Speed 11196 o ag Configure the setting Continuous Shooting AF O Press the a button choose 1 either press the 4 buttons
214. ng the procedure in Checking gt buttons or turn the 4 dial to eN People Detected in Face ID 11107 choose OK and then press the gan press the 6 button 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions choose an image and press the button button vi 8 Setting Menu o An orange frame is displayed around the A e You can also erase names by touching OK after Erase is selected face When multiple names are displayed displayed in an image press the gt buttons or turn the 4 dial to choose the name to change and then press the button ser ven o Q Accessories 10 Appendix Edit ID Info 3 Choose the editing option Index O Press the a W 4 buttons or turn the 4B dial to choose Overwrite and then press the button pr lt gt 111 Image Viewing Options Magnifying Images gt Still Images Magnify an image o Moving the zoom lever toward Q will zoom in and magnify the image You can magnify images up to about 10x by continuing to hold the zoom lever e The approximate position of the displayed area 1 is shown for reference e To zoom out move the zoom lever toward f You can return to single image display by continuing to hold it 1 2 Move the display position and switch images as needed e To move the display position press the AVII buttons o To switch to other images while zoomed turn the dB dial Q e
215. ng wireless transmission Also called the encryption key or network key e Key index transmit key The key set when WEP is used for network authentication data encryption Use 1 as the setting 1 e f system administrator status is needed to adjust network settings contact the system administrator for details e These settings are very important for network security Exercise adequate caution when changing these settings Q e For information on WPS compatibility and for instructions on checking settings refer to the access point user manual e A router is a device that creates a network LAN structure for connecting multiple computers A router that contains an internal Wi Fi function is called a Wi Fi router e This guide refers to all Wi Fi routers and base stations as access points e If you use MAC address filtering on your Wi Fi network be sure to add the camera s MAC address to your access point You can check your camera s MAC address by choosing MENU L430 gt YT tab gt Wi Fi Settings gt Check MAC Address Using WPS Compatible Access Points WPS makes it easy to complete settings when connecting devices over Wi Fi You can use either Push Button Configuration Method or PIN Method for settings on a WPS supported device 1 Confirm that the computer is connected to an access point O For instructions on checking the connection refer to the device and access point user man
216. nininnnas 85 Changing the Focus Setting oooocnnccncnnccccnnonnconnnnnnnnonancnnns 85 Choosing a Person to Focus On Face Select 85 Choosing Subjects to Focus On Touch AF ccccsessseeeeeeeees 86 Shooting with the AF LOCK ian cccisscs savcidscadsetnanespuccncetlvearsdetcaxeasstans 87 Shooting Continuously as the Camera Keeps the Subject in A o ence ea enon e a 87 A See eet ne eee ee rn ee eer ae eee eee are 88 Changing the Flash Mode suscrita 88 AUO A E E E E emanulartotecte 88 One q E eeneteass 88 SIOW SCG A Pe E ue noo e 88 E AE e e PP ES O E aoe 88 Adjusting the Flash Exposure CompensatiQN occcccoccccccnnnnnno 89 Shooting with the FE Loc aciinsninajmeiicd ii 89 Changing the Flash TiMiN9 cooccnonccnnncnonnncnncnncncnnacononnnns 90 Shooting RAW Images iscicsmsco arena 90 omer O ad me 91 Changing the Compression Ratio Image Quality 91 Changing the IS Mode Settings miccioniniicinaaiiricicia 91 Shooting Movies with Subjects at the Same Size Shown before SOONG corona oatadlcateiia 92 Switching the Color of Shooting Screen Information 92 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Index 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 5 Tv Av M and C Mode
217. nnnnocanonoconanoncnnnnos 120 Resizing Images soriana die 120 SP PPP A 121 Changing Image Color Tones My Colors ccccccsseeeeeeeeees 122 Correcting Image Brightness i Contrast ccccccsseeeeeeeeees 123 Correcting Red Eye estic nadia 123 ENE MOVIES soccer able EES 124 Reducing File SIZES iia 125 Editing Digest Movies osito 126 WIFI FUNCION Soniciin S 127 Available Wi Fi Features ccoonccccoccccconococonocononccnanononanonnnos 127 Sending Images to a SmartphoON e oooonccnnccccncnccnnccccnnancnos 128 Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button 128 Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi Fi Menu ce 130 Using Another Access Point ccccccseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaaees 182 Previous Access Points sionistas 132 Saving Images to a CoMputeT oooccnccccnoocnccnncconnonaconnccnonancnon 133 Preparing to Register a ComputeT cccooooocccnoncccccccnnnacononnnnnos 133 Checking Your Computer Environment c 00 ceeeeeeeeees 133 Installing the Software musica 133 Configuring the Computer for a Wi Fi Connection Windows OO arrasan 134 Saving Images to a Connected ComputeTF cccocccoccccccnncccnncnncos 135 Confirming Access Point Compatibility 135 Using WPS Compatible Access Points ooooccccnnccccccnncccnns 135 Connecting to Listed Access Points ccccccssssseseeeeeeeees 137 Previous Access Points
218. nsfer Select and send o After the images are sent OK is displayed Press the button to return to the playback screen add comments before sending H144 E E Before Use e Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in the camera e You can also send multiple images at once and resize images or Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode Wi Fi Functions Index 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 141 eee 5 Choose the printer Refresh Printer Before Use Printing Images Wirelessly from a Connected e Choose the printer name either press the A W buttons or turn the 4B dial and Basic Guide then press the button Connect the camera to a printer via Wi Fi to print as follows Search complete These steps show how to use the camera as an access point but you can Advanced Guide also use an existing access point 11132 Printer 7 E 6 Choose an image to print A Access the Wi Fi menu ERS paseo o Press the 4 buttons or turn the dB e Access the Wi Fi menu as described in PA dial to choose an image ey Auto Mode step a Pod ec Using pas Paper Settings o Press the button Hybrid Auto Mode the Wi Fi Menu LL1130 San i B Default tm gt O Press the A W buttons or turn the 4 3 Other Shooting Mod
219. o images are displayed will give you the option of choosing Erase M Erase JPEG or Erase MHEG for deletion ni d e You can also erase the current image by touching Erase on the screen in step 2 e Images can also be erased by using Touch Actions H4119 Erasing Multiple Images at Once You can choose multiple images to erase at once Be careful when erasing images because they cannot be recovered However protected images 111114 cannot be erased Choosing a Selection Method 4 Access the setting screen o Press the MENU button and then choose Erase on the gt tab 430 CANA Image Search List Play Digest Movies Smart Shuffle Slideshow 2 Choose a selection method e Choose a menu item and an option as desired 1130 e To return to the menu screen press the IMENU button Select Range Select All Images Choosing Images Individually Choose Select Following step 2 in Choosing a Selection Method 111116 choose Select and press the button 2 Choose an image Index e Once you choose an image following step 2 in Choosing Images Individually 11114 V is displayed o To cancel selection press the button again V is no longer displayed VE ox 0 Repeat this process to specify other images Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes
220. o Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 94 Q e MI Manual At ISO speeds other than R an exposure level mark 4 based on your specified shutter speed and aperture value is shown for comparison to the standard exposure level 3 d or P is displayed when the difference from standard exposure exceeds 2 stops e Calculation of standard exposure is based on the specified metering method H474 e You can customize camera operation so that turning the ring adjusts the shutter speed and turning the Be dial adjusts the aperture value 97 Adjusting the Flash Output gt gt Still Images Choose from the three flash levels in M mode 4 Enter M mode o Set the mode dial to MI 2 Specify the flash mode o Press the MENU button choose Flash Settings on the IE tab and then press the 63 button 430 O Press the a W buttons to choose Flash Mode press the d4 buttons to choose Manual and then press the IMENU button 3 Configure the setting O Raise the flash press the gt button and immediately turn the ring to choose the flash level and then press the button Once the setting is complete the flash output level is displayed BA Minimum BA Medium BA 1 Maximum You can also set the flash level b
221. o adjust left right tilt choose Horizontal Roll Calibration and to adjust forward backward tilt choose Vertical Pitch Calibration followed by the 9 button A confirmation message is displayed Choose OK and then press the button Vertical Pitch Calibration venu gt Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 92 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Index Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 155 Resetting the Electronic Level Restore the electronic level to its original state as follows Note that this is not possible unless you have calibrated the electronic level e Choose Electronic Level and then press the 3 button Choose Reset and then press the button e Choose OK and then press the button Electronic Level Horizontal Roll Calibration Vertical Pitch Calibration Reset Deactivating Touch Screen Operations The touch screen can be disabled to prevent unintended touch operations e Choose Touch Operation and then O x choose Off Create Folder Monthly Units m cm Electronic Level Video System NTSC uch Operation Off Increasing Touch Screen Panel Sensitivity Sensitivity of the touch screen panel can be increased so that the camera responds to a lighter touch e Choose
222. ock 4152 8 Setting Menu to specify any shooting destinations in other time zones Others may be able to locate or identify you by using location data in your geotagged still images or movies Be careful when sharing these images with others as when posting images online where many others can view them 10 Appendix 6 Playback Mode Q Accessories Index lt gt 5 147 Shooting Remotely As you check a shooting screen on your smartphone you can use it to shoot remotely 4 Secure the camera Once remote shooting begins the camera lens will come out Lens motion from zooming may also move the camera out of position Keep the camera still by mounting it on a tripod or taking other measures 2 Connect the camera and smartphone 111128 11130 o In the privacy settings choose Yes 3 Choose remote shooting o In CameraWindow on the smartphone choose remote shooting o The camera lens will come out Do not press near the lens and make sure no objects will obstruct it Once the camera is ready for remote shooting a live image from the camera will be displayed on the smartphone O At this time a message is displayed on the camera and all operations except pressing the power button are disabled 4 Shoot o Use the smartphone to shoot The camera works in P mode during remote shooting However some FUNC and MENU settings you have configured in advance may be changed automatically Mov
223. ode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode Wi Fi Functions Index 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 137 Q e To determine the access point password check on the access point itself or refer to the user manual e Up to 16 access points will be displayed If no access points are detected even after you choose Refresh in step 2 to update the list choose Manual Settings in step 2 to complete access point settings manually Follow on screen instructions and enter an SSID security settings and a password e When you use an access point that you have already connected to for connecting to another device is displayed for the password in step 3 To use the same password choose Next either press the A W buttons or turn the By dial and press the 69 button Previous Access Points You can reconnect to any previous access points automatically by following step 4 in Using WPS Compatible Access Points 11135 e To reconnect to the access point confirm that the target device is already connected to it and then follow the procedure from step 8 in Using WPS Compatible Access Points 11135 e To switch access points choose Switch Network on the screen displayed after connection and then either follow the procedure in Using WPS Compatible Access Points 111135 from step 5 or the procedure in Connecting to Listed Access Points 13
224. ode 6 Playback Mode Battery Pack NB 13L 7 Wi Fi Functions 7 ZA 8 Setting Menu LL 9 Accessories Wrist Strap Battery Charger CB 2LH CB 2LHE 10 Appendix Do not peel off the battery pack label Index e Printed matter is also included e A memory card is not included H2 lt gt 5 Preliminary Notes and Legal Information Take and review some test shots initially to make sure the images were recorded correctly Please note that Canon Inc its subsidiaries and affiliates and its distributors are not liable for any consequential damages arising from any malfunction of a camera or accessory including memory cards that result in the failure of an image to be recorded or to be recorded in a way that is machine readable Images recorded by the camera shall be for personal use Refrain from unauthorized recording that infringes on copyright law and note that even for personal use photography may contravene copyright or other legal rights at some performances or exhibitions or in some commercial settings The camera warranty is valid only in the area of purchase In case of camera problems while abroad return to the area of purchase before contacting a Canon Customer Support Help Desk Although the LCD monitor is produced under extremely high precision manufacturing conditions and more than 99 99 of the pixels meet design specifications in rare cases some pixels may be defective or may appear as
225. ode oe ce o Press the a W 4 buttons or turn DURA the 4B dial and then press the a You can also configure settings by touching a desired option and ES button to choose icons to include in the 7 Wi Fi Functions then touching it again or touching MEM ma FUNC menu Selected icons are marked Ew End with a Y 8 Setting Menu Selected items labeled with a Y will be included in display Q Accessories O Items without a Y will be available on the tab of the menu screen O Appendix 3 Configure the setting o Press the MENU button choose OK either press the 4 buttons or turn the 8 dial and then press the 9 button Index lt gt 5 100 Q e The screen in step 2 can also be accessed by holding down the 9 button when the FUNC menu is displayed e Items that you remove from the FUNC menu add to My Menu 11102 and then add to the FUNC menu again will be removed from My Menu Rearranging Menu Items 4 Access the setting screen e On the screen in step 2 of Choosing Items to Include in the Menu 1100 press the RNG button O Press the or gt button to choose an icon to move Press the 4 buttons or turn the dB dial to choose the new position and then press the 9 or q button re Select End 2 Configure the setting o Press the MENU button choose OK either press the 4 buttons or turn the 8 dial and then pre
226. oint Move the AF frame e Touch the screen An AF frame is displayed in orange where you touched Touch AF de e You can turn the dial to move the AF DAD center frame and press the a w 4 buttons to fine tune the position Move the frame o To return the AF frame to the original position in the center press the MENU button 2 Resize the AF frame e To reduce the AF frame size turn the IED ring Turn it again to restore it to the original size 3 Finish the setup process o Press the 9 button AF frames are displayed at normal size when you use the digital zoom 40 or digital tele converter H483 and in manual focus mode 181 Q e You can also link the Spot AE Point frame to the AF frame 075 e You can also configure the AF frame size by pressing the MEN UJ button and choosing AF Frame Size on the e tab 2130 nl NN e On the screen in step 2 you can also move the AF frame by touching the screen restore the AF frame to the original position by touching MANI or exit the setting by touching KAN Face AiAF gt gt Still Images gt Movies e Detects people s faces and then sets the focus exposure evaluative metering only and white balance MA only e After you aim the camera at the subject a white frame is displayed around the person s face determined by the camera to be the main subject and up to two gray frames are displayed around other detected f
227. om Off Servo AF Off Continuous AF Off Helps avoid missing sudden photo opportunities because the camera constantly focuses on subjects until you press the shutter button halfway Choosing a Person to Focus On Face Select gt gt Still Images You can shoot after choosing a specific person s face to focus on P E dl 1547 34 55 E MO Prepare the camera for Face Select Oo Set the AF frame to Face AiAF N84 e Assign FE to the RYS button 99 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode Index 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 85 2 Enter Face Select mode o Aim the camera at the person s face and press the Ae button o After Face Select On is displayed a face frame is displayed around the face detected as the main subject o Even if the subject moves the face frame 7 follows the subject within a certain range o If a face is not detected 7 is not displayed 3 Choose the face to focus on o To switch the face frame to another detected face press the FR button o After you have switched the face frame to all detected faces Face Select Off is displayed and the specified AF frame mode screen is displayed again 4 Shoot Press the shutter button halfway After the camer
228. on 4 Lens 15 Tripod socket AS 9 9 O Accessories 5 Exposure compensation dial 16 Memory card battery cover 8 Movie button 6 Mode dial 17 DC coupler terminal cover 9 Qi Drive mode p Wi Fi 10 Appendix Up button 7 Shutter button ay Powerbuilon 4 Used with NFC features 128 index 2 Gestures may not be detected as easily if you apply a screen protector In this case increase the sensitivity of the touch screen panel H156 e Turning the control dial is one way to choose setting items switch images and perform other operations Most of these operations are also possible with the gt 4 4 buttons In this guide icons are used to represent the corresponding camera buttons and dials on which they appear or which they resemble The following camera buttons and controls are represented by icons ED Control ring 11 on front 4 Up button 9 on back q Left button 16 on back gt Right button 11 on back vV Down button 12 on back Control dial 6 on back Shooting modes and on screen icons and text are indicated in brackets Important information you should know 2 Notes and tips for expert camera use Indicates touch screen operations xx Pages with related information in this example xx represents a page number Instructions in this guide apply to the camera under default settings For convenience all supported memory cards are simply
229. onfigure the setting ve i we w and then press the button O J 4 P Mode O Press the a W 4 buttons or turn the 4B dial to choose an item and then press the button Items you choose for display are labeled with V Selected items labeled with a Y will be included in display menu Ea 2 Configure the setting O Press the a W 4 buttons or turn the 4B dial to choose a function to assign and then press the 9 button 3 Use the assigned function as needed 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions Shooting Info Displays shooting information 0179 Displays a reference grid o To activate an assigned function press the button you assigned it to 8 Setting Menu Electronic Level Displays the electronic level L150 Displays a histogram 11105 in MI Av Tv P Pam PE and 2 modes Q Accessories 10 Appendix e Settings will not be saved if you press the shutter button halfway and return to the shooting screen from the custom display settings Index screen e Grayed out items can also be specified but they may not be displayed in some shooting modes lt gt 5 99 G e Grid lines are not recorded in your shots To restore default settings choose Ke in Set RNE button and Custom izing the FUNC Menu bs PAR in Set YR button FUNC Menu Layout Icons labeled with Q indicate that the function is not av
230. ong impacts If the screen cracks injury may result from the broken fragments e When using the flash be careful not to cover it with your fingers or clothing This could result in burns or damage to the flash e Avoid using placing or storing the product in the following places Places subject to direct sunlight Places subject to temperatures above 40 C 104 F Humid or dusty places These could cause leakage overheating or an explosion of the battery pack batteries resulting in electrical shock fire burns or other injuries Overheating and damage may result in electrical shock fire burns or other injuries e The slideshow transition effects may cause discomfort when viewed for prolonged periods e When using optional lenses lens filters or filter adapters if applicable be sure to attach these accessories firmly If the lens accessory becomes loose and falls off it may crack and the shards of glass may lead to cuts e On products that raise and lower the flash automatically make sure to avoid pinching your fingers with the lowering flash This could result in injury Denotes the possibility of property damage Basic Guide e Donot aim the camera at intense light sources such as the sun on a clear day or an intense artificial light source Doing so may damage the image sensor or other internal components e When using the camera on a sandy beach or at a windy location be careful not to allow dust
231. oose Print now Print List 7 1 F i EPIA Print Print ias and then simply press the button to print the images in the print list e Any DPOF print job that you temporarily stop will be resumed from the next image Adding Images to a Photobook gt gt Still Images Photobooks can be set up on the camera by choosing up to 998 images on a memory card and importing them into the software on your computer where they are stored in their own folder This is convenient when ordering printed photobooks online or printing photobooks with your own printer Choosing a Selection Method o Press the MENU button choose E Photobook Set up on the gt tab and Protect then choose how you will select images Rotate Favorites 1 e Q may be displayed on the camera to warn you that the memory card has print settings that were configured on another camera Changing the print settings using this camera may overwrite all previous settings G e After importing images to your computer also refer to Software Instruction Manual 1163 and the printer manual for further information Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 92 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories Index 10 Appendix lt gt 5 171 Adding Images Individually Ph
232. or turn the 8h dial and then press the 69 button o Once the setting is complete 2 is displayed 2 Shoot o Hold the shutter button all the way down to shoot continuously LIA RA A li G WS gt o The images are managed together as a group H110 1 e In 8 mode 1155 manual focus mode 1181 or when AF is locked 487 fi is changed to 41 Cannot be used with the self timer L141 e Shooting may stop momentarily or continuous shooting may slow down depending on shooting conditions camera settings and the zoom position e Asmore shots are taken shooting may slow down e Shooting may slow down if the flash fires With Touch Shutter H442 the camera shoots continuously while you touch the screen Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode Index 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 87 Changing the Flash Mode gt Still Images You can change the flash mode to match the shooting scene For details on the flash range see Flash Range 1196 Raise the flash o Move the switch 2 Configure the setting o Press the gt button choose a flash mode either press the 4 buttons or turn the 4 dial and then press the button ay aj o The option you configured is now d
233. or turn the db dial to choose an image and then press the 9 button 3 Choose an image size o Press the 4 buttons or turn the db dial to choose the size and then press the button o Save new image is displayed Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode Index 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 120 4 Save the new image o Press the 4 buttons or turn the dB dial to choose OK and then press the 9 button Save di o The image is now saved as a new file Cancel 5 Review the new image o Press the MENU button Display new image is displayed o Press the gt buttons or turn the dial to choose Yes and then press the I button e The saved image is now displayed Display new image 1 e Editing is not possible for images shot at a resolution of IS A49 RAW images cannot be edited G e Images cannot be resized to a higher resolution e You can also configure this setting by touching the size on the screen in step 3 touching it again and then touching OK e You can also view saved images by touching Yes on the screen in step 5 Cropping gt gt Still Images You can specify a portion of an image to save as a separate image file Choose Cro
234. ormance and the Internet connection Click Finish or Restart on the screen after installation o After installation when the camera is connected to the computer turn the camera off before disconnecting the cable G e Because the content and functions of software vary according to the camera model if you have several cameras you must use each camera to update to its latest version of the software Configuring the Computer for a Wi Fi Connection Windows Only On a computer running Windows configure the following settings before connecting the camera to the computer wirelessly 7 ce N q Confirm that the computer is connected to an access point connection refer to the computer user manual 2 Configure the setting Click in the following order Start menu gt All Programs gt Canon Utilities gt CameraWindow gt Wi Fi connection setup e In the application that opens follow the on screen instructions and configure the setting e The following Windows settings are configured when you run the utility in step 2 Turn on media streaming This will enable the camera to see find the computer to access via Wi Fi Turn on network discovery This will enable the computer to see find the camera Turn on ICMP Internet Control Message Protocol This allows you to check the network connection status Enable Universal Plug amp Play UPnP This will enable network devices to dete
235. ot available when shooting movies even if you turn the E ring e When you are using digital zoom H440 you cannot adjust the zoom factor by turning the E ring counterclockwise However you can set the focal length to 100 mm by turning it clockwise Using the Self Timer Before Use gt gt Still Images gt Movies With the self timer you can include yourself in group photos or other timed shots The camera will shoot about 10 seconds after you press the shutter button Advanced Guide Configure the setting Camera Basics o Press the button choose tr in the Basic Guide AA Auto Mode menu and then choose 03 129 2 Hybrid Auto Mode e Once the setting is complete 47 is displayed 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 2 Shoot 6 Playback Mode For Still Images Press the shutter button halfway to focus on the subject and then 7 Wi Fi Functions press it all the way down For Movies Press the movie button 8 Setting Menu Once you start the self timer the lamp will blink and the camera will play a self timer sound O Accessories e Two seconds before the shot the blinking and sound will speed up The lamp will 10 Appendix remain lit in case the flash fires e To cancel shooting after you have Index triggered the self timer press the IMENU button o To restore the original setting choose tj in step 1 lt gt 5 41 Using the
236. ot transfer images to a computer e When attempting to transfer images to the computer via a cable try reducing the transfer speed as follows Press the button to enter Playback mode Hold the MENU button down as you press the 4 and G buttons at the same time On the next screen press the q gt buttons to choose B and then press the 9 button Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix Index lt gt 5 175 Wi Fi Cannot access the Wi Fi menu by pressing the a button The Wi Fi menu is not available in Shooting mode Switch to Playback mode and try again In Playback mode the Wi Fi menu cannot be accessed during magnified display or index display Switch to single image display and try again Similarly the Wi Fi menu cannot be accessed during group playback or filtered image display according to specified conditions Cancel group or filtered image playback The Wi Fi menu cannot be accessed while the camera is connected to a printer computer or TV via a cable Disconnect the cable Cannot add a device destination A total of 20 items of connection information can be added to the camera Erase unneeded connection information from the camera first and then add new devices destinations 11149 Use a
237. otobook Set up Select Select All Images Clear All Selections No of images 0 EN y MENU ox gt gt Still Images 4 Choose Select Following the procedure in Choosing a Selection Method 1 171 choose Select and press the button 2 Choose an image o Press the 4 buttons or turn the dB dial to choose an image and then press the 9 button o Y is displayed e To remove the image from the photobook press the button again V is no longer displayed Repeat this process to specify other images o When finished press the MENU button to return to the menu screen Adding All Images to a Photobook Select All Images Set 1 copy per image Cancel gt gt Still Images Following the procedure in Choosing a Selection Method 11171 choose Select All Images and press the button o Press the 4 buttons or turn the dB dial to choose OK and then press the 9 button Removing All Images from a Photobook gt gt Still Images Following the procedure in Choosing a Selection Method 1171 choose Clear All Selections and press the button o Press the 4 buttons or turn the db dial to choose OK and then press the ED button Clear All Selections Deselect all images Cancel Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Ot
238. ow dust or metal objects such as pins or keys to contact the terminals or plug Do not cut damage alter or place heavy items on the power cord if your product uses one This could result in electrical shock or fire e Turn the camera off in places where camera use is prohibited The electromagnetic waves emitted by the camera may interfere with the operation of electronic instruments and other devices Exercise adequate caution when using the product in places where use of electronic devices is restricted such as inside airplanes and medical facilities e Do not allow the camera to maintain contact with skin for extended periods Even if the camera does not feel hot this may cause low temperature burns manifested in redness of the skin or blistering Use a tripod in hot places or if you have poor circulation or insensitive skin Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Index 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 15 x Denotes the possibility of injury e When carrying the product by the strap be careful not to bang it subject it to strong impacts or shocks or let it get caught on other objects e Becareful not to bump or push strongly on the lens This could lead to injury or damage the camera e Be careful not to subject the screen to str
239. ow you connect the devices you can also use the smartphone to geotag H147 camera images and shoot remotely 111148 Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button Once you have connected to a smartphone initially by pressing the L button you can simply press the button after that to connect again for viewing and saving camera images on connected devices These steps show how to use the camera as an access point but you can also use an existing access point 132 Install CameraWindow o For an NFC compatible Android smartphone OS version 4 0 or later activating NFC and touching the smartphone against the camera s N Mark will start Google Play on the smartphone Once the CameraWindow download page is displayed download and install the app O For other Android smartphones find CameraWindow in Google Play and download and install the app o For an iPhone iPad or iPod touch find CameraWindow in the App Store and download and install the app 2 Press the button o Press the LJ button eo When the Device Nickname screen is displayed press the button Use the keyboard displayed to enter a nickname L432 On the Device Nickname screen choose OK either press the A W buttons or turn the 4B dial and then press the button Device Nickname Enter a nickname for this camera Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode
240. plete the setup process on the smartphone or computer Cancel o E1 1145 and CANON iMAGE GATEWAY are now added as destinations and the dh icon changes to deb o A message is displayed on the smartphone or computer to indicate that this process is finished To add other Web services follow the procedure n Registering Other Web Services 2140 from step 2 Transfer images btwn cameras JE D fl e MEM gt G e Connections require that a memory card with saved images be in the camera e Once you have connected to devices via the Wi Fi menu recent destinations will be listed first when you access the menu Press the q P buttons to access the device selection screen and choose a device Registering Other Web Services You can also add Web services besides CANON iMAGE GATEWAY to the camera Note that CANON iMAGE GATEWAY must be registered on the camera first 11139 Jo JEZ 4 Access the Web service settings screen o Follow step 1 in Registering CANON iMAGE GATEWAY 4139 to log in to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY and then access the Web service settings screen 2 Configure the Web service you want to use O Follow the instructions displayed on the smartphone or computer to set up the Web service Update Web service 3 Choose ed dr o In Playback mode press the 4 button to access the Wi Fi menu o Press the a W 4 buttons or turn the 4 dial to choose and then press the
241. pping Favorites o Press the MENU button and then Photobook Set up ran choose Cropping on the gt tab Red Eye Correction AA 30 Cropping 2 Choose an image o Press the 4 buttons or turn the db dial to choose an image and then press the 3 button 1 2 3 3 Adjust the cropping area o A frame is displayed around the portion of the image to be cropped 1 Q o The original image is shown in the upper left and a preview of the image as EN E cropped 2 is shown in the lower right e You can also see the resolution after cropping 3 e To resize the frame move the zoom lever ser TE E ba S e To move the frame press the q 4 97 4 buttons ueno E e To change the frame orientation press the 69 button Faces detected in the image are enclosed in gray frames in the upper left image To crop the image based on this frame turn the 4B dial to switch to the other frame o Press the MENU button Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode Index 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 121 4 Save as a new image and review O Follow steps 4 5 in Resizing Images 1 1120 1 e Editing is not possible for images shot at a resolution of IS R49 or resized to S
242. ra can detect smiles more easily when subjects face the camera and open their mouth wide enough so that teeth are visible e To change the number of shots press the A W buttons after choosing L in step 1 Blink Detection L151 is only available for the final shot e You can also choose the shooting mode by choosing Ej in steps 1 2 of Specific Scenes L155 touching BINA to access the setting screen touching LEI and then touching the same option or KA Using the Wink Self Timer gt gt Still Images Aim the camera at a person and press the shutter button all the way down The camera will shoot about two seconds after a wink is detected Choose cx o Follow steps 1 2 in Specific Scenes Q155 and choose gj and then press the W button o Press the 4 buttons or turn the dif dial to choose and then press the 5 button 2 Compose the shot and press the shutter button halfway e On the screen touch the face of the person who will wink to choose it Touch AP and then press the shutter button halfway O Make sure a green frame is displayed around the face of the person who will wink lt 3 Press the shutter button all the way down eo The camera now enters shooting standby mode and Wink to take picture is displayed o The lamp blinks and the self timer sound is played 4 Face the camera and wink eo The camera will shoot about two seconds a
243. ra will shoot continuous images Ep or H1 ae Smiling Consecutive images are captured and the camera including Babies analyzes details such as facial expressions to save the image determined to be the best Beautiful shots of sleeping faces created by Sleeping combining consecutive shots to reduce camera including Babies shake and image noise The AF assist beam will not light up the flash will not fire and the shutter sound will not be played Al So you don t miss a photo opportunity of children who move around the camera will capture three consecutive images for each shot Children In some scenes expected images may not be saved and images may not look as expected Focus image brightness and color are determined by the first shot e When you want to shoot single images only press the ax button and then select _ either press the 4 P buttons or turn the 8 dial Image Stabilization Icons gt gt Still Images gt Movies Optimal image stabilization for the shooting conditions is automatically applied Intelligent IS Additionally the following icons are displayed in 138 and AUTO modes ry Image stabilization for still images Normal Image stabilization for still images when panning Panning Image stabilization for macro shots During movie recording KWa is displayed and image stabilization for macro movie recording is used Hybrid IS Image
244. ral focal position and then press the button e To adjust the magnification press the gt button During magnified display you can move the focusing frame by dragging on the screen 3 Fine tune the focus o Press the shutter button halfway to have the camera fine tune the focal position Safety MF Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode Index 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 81 O When you focus manually the AF frame mode H483 is 1 point and AF frame size 84 is Normal and these settings cannot be changed Focusing is possible when using the digital zoom 440 or digital tele converter 483 or when using a TV as a display 11161 but the magnified display will not appear G e You can also adjust the focus by turning the ring L197 e Tofocus more accurately try attaching the camera to a tripod to stabilize it e You can enlarge or hide the magnified display area by adjusting MENU 1130 Q tab gt MF Point Zoom settings e To deactivate automatic focus fine tuning when the shutter button is pressed halfway choose MENU 1130 Y tab gt Safety MF Off Nl y e You can lock the focus during recording by touching AF MF is then displayed Easily Identifying the Focus Area MF Peaking gt gt Sti
245. ration of the product the effects of radio waves or static electricity or accident or malfunction Be sure to make notes of wireless LAN settings as a precaution Please note that Canon accepts no responsibility for direct or indirect damages or loss of earnings resulting from a degradation or disappearance of content e When transferring this product to another person disposing of it or sending it for repair be sure to note the wireless LAN settings and reset the product to its default settings erase settings if necessary e Canon will not make compensation for damages resulting from loss or theft of the product Canon accepts no responsibility for damages or loss resulting from unauthorized access or use of target devices registered on this product due to loss or theft of the product Be sure to use the product as directed in this guide Be sure to use the wireless LAN function of this product within the guidelines noted in this guide Canon accepts no responsibility for damages or loss if the function and product are used in ways other than as described in this guide Do not use the wireless LAN function of this product near medical equipment or other electronic equipment Use of the wireless LAN function near medical equipment or other electronic equipment may affect operation of those devices Radio Wave Interference Precautions This product may receive interference from other devices that emit radio waves To avoid interferen
246. rection levels even if you switch to another white balance option in step 2 but correction levels will be reset if you record custom white balance data Q e B represents blue and A amber e White balance can also be manually corrected by recording custom white balance data L79 before following the preceding steps Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes Index 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 dl Image Effects Creative Filters Add a variety of effects to images when shooting Enter 9 mode o Set the mode dial to Q 2 Choose a shooting mode o Press the 9 button choose HDR in the menu and then choose a shooting mode 129 mg osm A Sg 3 Shoot A Shooting in Vivid Colors Super Vivid gt gt Still Images gt Movies e Shots in rich vivid colors W Posterized Shots Poster Effect gt gt Still Images gt Movies Shots that resemble an old poster or illustration In and Ld modes try taking some test shots first to make sure you obtain the desired results Shooting High Contrast Scenes High Dynamic Range gt gt Still Images Three consecutive images are captured at different brightness levels each time you shoot and the camera combines image areas with optimal brightness to crea
247. red or black dots This does not indicate camera damage or affect recorded images The LCD monitor may be covered with a thin plastic film for protection against scratches during shipment If covered remove the film before using the camera When the camera is used over an extended period it may become warm This does not indicate damage Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Index Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 Part Names and Conventions in This Guide Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 92 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 16 15 14 1 Screen LCD monitor 2 10 FUNC SET button 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 1 Zoom lever 9 Speaker 2 Microphone 11 Flash Right button de ee 10 Flash 3 DIGITAL terminal 12 IDISP Display Down button eos wide angle Playback Ql magnify ile See ies 7 Wi Fi Functions ea index 12 Flash up switch 5 LJ Mobile Device Connection button 14 IMENU button 2 St t 13 Wi Fi antenna area i 2 rap moun 13 6 Control dial 15 D Playback button 8 Setting Menu 3 Lamp 14 N Mark 7 G Ring function selector 16 NY Macro MF Manual focus TI Single image erase button Left butt
248. reen quickly darkens to reduce battery consumption O 4 Configure the setting ib e Choose Eco Mode and then choose Date Time 08 08 14 10 00 Time Zone A On ECO is now shown on the shooting screen 11179 o The screen darkens when the camera is not used for approximately two seconds approximately ten seconds after darkening the screen turns off The camera turns off after approximately three minutes of inactivity Lens Retraction 1 min Eco Mode On 2 Shoot o To activate the screen and prepare for shooting when the screen is off but the lens is still out press the shutter button halfway Power Saving Adjustment Adjust the timing of automatic camera and screen deactivation Auto Power Down and Display Off respectively as needed H427 e Choose Power Saving and then press the 69 button o After choosing an item press the d4 buttons to adjust it as needed Power Saving Auto PowerDown On Display Off 1 min O To conserve battery power you should normally choose On for Auto Power Down and 1 min or less for Display Off G e The Display Off setting is applied even if you set Auto Power Down to Off e These power saving functions are not available when you have set Eco mode 1153 to On Screen Brightness Adjust screen brightness as follows Choose LCD Brightness and then press the q gt buttons to adjust the brightness
249. res 0 40 C 32 104 F mee Dimensions 29 6 x 42 0 x 9 5 mm 1 17 x 1 65 x 0 37 in Weight Approx 22 g approx 0 78 oz lt gt 5 197 Numbers 1 point AF frame mode 83 A AC adapter kit 159 162 Accessories 159 AEB shooting 76 AE lock 74 AF frames 83 AF lock 87 Aspect ratio 48 AUTO mode shooting mode 22 34 Av shooting mode 94 AV cable 162 B Background defocus shooting mode 62 Batteries Date time date time battery Battery charger 2 159 Battery pack Charging 19 Eco mode 153 Level 179 Power saving 27 Black and white images 80 Blink detection 51 C C shooting mode 98 Camera Reset all 157 Camera access point mode 132 CameraWindow computer 163 CameraWindow smartphone 128 CANON iMAGE GATEWAY 138 Clock 33 Color white balance 78 Compression ratio image quality 91 Connecting via an access point 135 Continuous shooting 39 43 Control ring 97 98 109 Creative filters shooting mode 58 Creative Shot 54 Cropping 121 167 Custom white balance 79 D Date time Changing 21 Date time battery 21 Settings 20 World clock 152 DC coupler 162 Defaults Reset all Digital tele converter 83 Digital zoom 40 Display language 22 DPOF 169 Dynamic Range Correction 77 E Eco mode 153 Editing Cropping 121 i Contrast 123 My Colors 122 Red eye correction 123 Resizing images 120 Editing or erasing connection information 149 Electronic level 50 Erasing 116
250. ress the 4 buttons or turn the dB dial to choose Switch Network and then press the button o A list of detected access points will be displayed Waiting to connect Connect target device to this access point and start app SSID XXXX_XXXXX_XXXX Cancel Switch Network 4 Connect to the access point and Select Network Refresh choose the smartphone WPS Connection o For WPS compatible access points connect to the access point and choose the smartphone as described in steps 5 8 in Using WPS Compatible Access Points 1135 o For non WPS access points follow steps 2 4 in Connecting to Listed Access Points 111137 to connect to the AccessPointl AccessPoint2 access point and choose the smartphone 5 Configure the privacy settings and send images O Follow steps 5 6 in Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi Fi Menu 11130 to configure the privacy settings and send images Previous Access Points To reconnect to a previous access point automatically follow step 3 in Sending to a Smartphone Assigned to the Button 111128 or step 4 in Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi Fi Menu 4130 e To use the camera as an access point choose Switch Network on the screen displayed when you establish a connection and then choose Camera Access Point Mode e To reconnect to a previous access point follow the procedure from step 5 in Using Another Access Poin
251. rid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories Index 10 Appendix lt gt 5 163 Computer Connections via a Cable Checking Your Computer Environment The software can be used on the following computers For detailed system requirements and compatibility information including support in new operating systems visit the Canon website Operating x Windows 8 8 1 Mac OS X 10 9 System Windows 7 SP1 Mac OS X 10 8 When sending images to a computer via Wi Fi check the system requirements in Checking Your Computer Environment 4133 e Check the Canon website for the latest system requirements including supported OS versions Installing the Software For software installation instructions see Installing the Software 133 Saving Images to a Computer Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10 8 are used here for the sake of illustration For other functions refer to the help system of the relevant software some software excluded 4 Connect the camera to the computer e With the camera turned off open the cover 1 With the smaller plug of the USB cable in the orientation shown insert the plug fully into the camera terminal 2 o Insert the larger plug of the USB cable in the computer s USB port For details about USB connections on the computer refer to the computer user manual 2 Turn the camera o
252. rotected images on a memory card will be erased if you format the card 154 1154 e Protected images cannot be erased using the camera s erasure function To erase them this way first cancel protection Choosing Images Individually 4 Choose Select Following step 2 in Choosing a Selection Method 1 1114 choose Select and press the button 2 Choose an image o Press the q gt buttons or turn the db dial to choose an image and then press the button lol is displayed o To cancel selection press the 6 amp 9 button E ox again e l is no longer displayed Repeat this process to specify other images protect 3 Protect the image o Press the MENU button A confirmation message is displayed o Press the 4 buttons or turn the db dial to choose OK and then press the 9 button Accept changes Stop Images will not be protected if you switch to Shooting mode or turn the camera off before finishing the setup process in step 3 Nl NN e You can also select or clear images by touching the screen in step 2 and you can access the confirmation screen by touching MEM e You can also protect images by touching OK on the screen in step 3 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode Index 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Se
253. rtain shooting conditions may prevent you from obtaining the desired results G e For the best results with this effect try shooting close to the subject and ensure ample distance between the subject and background e There may be a delay after shooting before you can shoot again e To adjust the effect level turn the ring Shooting with a Soft Focus Effect gt gt Still Images This function allows you to shoot images as if a soft focus filter were attached to the camera You can adjust the effect level as desired 4 Choose O Follow steps 1 2 in Image Effects Creative Filters 1158 and choose AL 15700 o 2 Choose an effect level o Turn the Z ring to choose an effect level o A preview is shown of how your shot will look with the effect applied ofaa ETD 3 Shoot e Try taking some test shots first to make sure you obtain the desired results Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes Index 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 62 Shooting in Monochrome gt gt Still Images gt Movies Shoot images in black and white sepia or blue and white Choose Ld o Follow steps 1 2 in Image Effects Creative Filters 1158 and choose La 2 Choose a color tone e Turn the Z ring to
254. s To view the previous image press the 4 button or turn the dB dial counterclockwise To view the next image press the button or turn the dial clockwise Press and hold the 4 buttons to browse through images quickly To access this screen Scroll Display mode turn the dB dial rapidly In this mode turn the 4B dial to browse through images To return to single image display press the 6 button To browse images grouped by shooting date press the 4 buttons in Scroll Display mode Movies are identified by a SAB icon To play movies go to step 3 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode Index 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix 103 3 Play movies o To start playback press the button to access the movie control panel choose gt either press the 4 gt buttons or turn the 4B dial and then press the button again 4 Adjust the volume O Press the a w buttons to adjust the volume re o To adjust the volume when the volume a indicator 1 is no longer displayed press the A w buttons 1 Pause playback e To pause or resume playback press the 9 button o After the movie is finished SAD is displayed Q e To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mod
255. s 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 oF Scene Icons gt gt Still Images gt Movies In JE and AUTO modes shooting scenes determined by the camera are indicated by the icon displayed and corresponding settings are automatically selected for optimal focusing subject brightness and color Depending on the scene continuous images may be shot H39 Background pos Jer far ts pomore Jer fer e seawsonrace fer Po song ee sews fer fer s oje EA IE smosso esmas or wr pomon j onesies far jer e a Oo onernownesunecs Or Jer Other Close Range Qe Be Subjects Tripod Used E The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky dark blue when the background is dark and gray for all other backgrounds 3 The background color of icons is light blue when the background is a blue sky and gray for all other backgrounds The background color of EY PY BY VY and Pel is dark blue and the background color of P3 is orange For movies only People Other Subjects and Other Close Range Subjects icons are displayed In S mode icons are only displayed for People Shadows on Face Other Subjects and Other Close Range Subjects For self timer shots icons are not displayed for the following subjects movin
256. s displayed press the 4 buttons or turn the 4B dial to choose Erase and then press the 6 button o The current image is now erased e To cancel erasure press the 4 gt buttons or turn the 4B dial to choose Cancel and then press the 3 button Q e You can choose multiple images to erase at once H4116 I e You can also erase the current image by touching Erase on the screen in step 2 e Images can also be erased by using Touch Actions H4119 Before Use Advanced Guide Index 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 25 On Off Before Use Basic Guide Shooting Mode Press the power button to turn the Advanced Guide camera on and prepare for shooting To turn the camera off press the power Camera Basics button again Advanced Guide Camera Basics Auto Mode 2 Playback Mode Hybrid Auto Mode Press the gt button to turn the camera on and view your shots Other basic operations and more ways to enjoy your rra is off press the P A P Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes camera including shooting and playback options To switch to Playback mode from Shooting mode press the D ia O button To switch to Shooting mode from Playback mode press the 6 Playback Mode shutter button
257. s of Apple Inc Wi Fi Wi Fi Alliance WPA WPA2 and Wi Fi Protected Setup are trademarks or registered trademarks of the Wi Fi Alliance The N Mark is a trademark or registered trademark of NFC Forum Inc in the United States and in other countries All other trademarks are the property of their respective owners This device incorporates exFAT technology licensed from Microsoft This product is licensed under AT amp T patents for the MPEG 4 standard and may be used for encoding MPEG 4 compliant video and or decoding MPEG 4 compliant video that was encoded only 1 for a personal and non commercial purpose or 2 by a video provider licensed under the AT amp T patents to provide MPEG 4 compliant video No license is granted or implied for any other use for MPEG 4 standard Disclaimer Unauthorized reproduction of this guide is prohibited All measurements based on Canon testing standards Information subject to change without notice as are product specifications and appearance Illustrations and screenshots in this guide may differ slightly from the actual equipment The above items notwithstanding Canon cannot be held liable for any loss arising from the use of this product Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Index 1 Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10
258. s point H4145 Before moving or renaming these image files or folders on the computer make sure the images have already been sent to CANON iMAGE GATEWAY or other Web services Cannot resize images for sending Images cannot be resized to be bigger than the resolution setting of their original size Movies cannot be resized Images take a long time to send The wireless connection is disrupted Multiple images may take a long time to send Try resizing the image to M2 or S to reduce sending time 111145 Movies may take a long time to send Do not use the camera near sources of Wi Fi signal interference such as microwave ovens Bluetooth devices or other equipment operating on the 2 4 GHZ band Note that images may take a long time to send even when NI is displayed Bring the camera closer to the other device you are trying to connect to such as the access point and make sure there are no objects between the devices Want to erase Wi Fi connection information before disposing of the camera or giving it to someone else Reset the Wi Fi settings H4150 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix Index lt gt 5 176 On Screen Messages If an error message is displayed respond as follows Capture or Playback No
259. s the 4 buttons or turn the dial to choose an image labeled with G3 and then press the button 2 View images in the group individually o Pressing the 4 buttons or turning the o Pressing the a button will display Display all images Press 9 to cancel group playback 8 dial will display only images in the group During group playback step 2 you can browse through images quickly Navigating through Images in an Index 21107 and magnify them Magnifying Images L112 By choosing Protect All Images in Group in Protecting Images 4114 or All Images in Group in Erasing Multiple Images at Once 01116 or Adding Images to the Print List DPOF 4169 or Adding Images to a Photobook 4171 all images in the group can be manipulated at once To ungroup images so that they are displayed only as single still images choose MENU H30 gt Pdi tab gt Group Images Off H430 However grouped images cannot be ungrouped during individual playback In A mode the simultaneous display after step 2 in Enjoying a Variety of Images from Each Shot Creative Shot 54 is only shown immediately after you shoot You can also view group images individually by touching NAM on the screen in step 1 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mo
260. s the MENU button choose Night A E Display on the 69 tab and then choose Review image after shooting On 430 Blink Detection Off Custom Display Night Display 1 The color is not adjusted in Playback mode Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode Index 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 92 Tv Av M and C Mode Take smarter more sophisticated shots and customize the camera for your shooting style e Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera as set to the respective mode Specific Shutter Speeds Tv Mode gt gt Still Images Set your preferred shutter speed before shooting as follows The camera automatically adjusts the aperture value to suit your shutter speed For details on available shutter speeds see Shutter Speed 111197 Enter Tv mode Set the mode dial to Ty LA pido 36 2 Set the shutter speed Turn the EJ ring to set the shutter speed Shutter Speed Sec Available ISO Speed L175 AUTO 125 3200 1 1 2000 AUTO 125 12800 In conditions requiring slower shutter speeds there may be a i delay before you can shoot again as the camera processes images to reduce noise When shooting at low shutter speeds on a tripod you should set
261. s to focus on the subject and adjust the exposure as long as you press the shutter button halfway Configure the setting T x o Press the MENU button choose Servo A RL Smlaee AF on the g j tab and then choose On 1130 2 Focus e The focus and exposure are maintained where the blue AF frame is displayed while you are pressing the shutter button halfway 1 Focusing may not be possible in some shooting conditions e In low light conditions Servo AF may not be activated AF frames may not turn blue when you press the shutter button halfway In this case the focus and exposure are set according to the specified AF frame mode f adequate exposure cannot be obtained shutter speeds and aperture values are displayed in orange Release the shutter button and then press it halfway again AF lock shooting is not available e AF Point Zoom on the N tab 1130 is not available Not available when using the self timer L141 Changing the Focus Setting gt gt Still Images You can change default camera operation of constantly focusing on subjects it is aimed at even when the shutter button is not pressed Instead you can limit camera focusing to the moment you press the shutter button halfway o Press the MENU button choose Continuous AF on the gj tab and then choose Off 430 O fT gt AF Frame Size Normal Digital Zoom Standard AF Point Zo
262. sharpness color saturation and other qualities as desired 480 1 White balance 1178 cannot be set in e or Gy modes e With 91 and SD modes colors other than people s skin tone may change These settings may not produce the expected results with some skin tones Custom Color B Still Images gt Movies Choose the desired level of image contrast sharpness color saturation red green blue and skin tones in a range of 1 5 Access the setting screen Follow the steps in Changing Image Color Tones My Colors 180 to choose 4 and then press the AN button 2 Configure the setting O Press the a W buttons to choose an option and then specify the value by pressing the 4 buttons or turning the dial o For stronger more intense effects or darker skin tones adjust the value to the right and for weaker lighter effects or lighter skin tones adjust the value to the left O Press the 2 button to complete the setting nl IN e You can also specify a value by touching or dragging the bar Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode Index 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 80 Shooting in Manual Focus Mode Before Use Shooting Range and Focusing Still Images Movies g
263. shooting screen and then shoot Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes Index 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 60 Playback Speed and Estimated Playback Time for One Minute Clips Playback Time Approx 12 sec 1 The zoom is not available when shooting movies Be sure to set the zoom before shooting e Try taking some test shots first to make sure you obtain the desired results Q e To switch the orientation of the frame to vertical press the q P buttons in step 2 To return the frame to horizontal orientation press the A W buttons e To move the frame when it is in horizontal orientation press the Qa V buttons and to move the frame when it is in vertical orientation press the 4 D buttons e Holding the camera vertically will change the orientation of the frame e Movie image quality is yGA at an aspect ratio of 4 3 and En at an aspect ratio of 16 9 448 These quality settings cannot be changed e You can also move the frame by touching or dragging across the screen Shooting with a Toy Camera Effect Toy Camera Effect gt gt Still Images This effect makes images resemble shots from a toy camera by vignetting darker blurred image corners and changing the overall color Choose 0
264. shooting still images 3 Shoot o Follow step 4 in Shooting Smart Auto 1134 to shoot a still image e The camera records both a still image and movie clip The clip which ends with the still image and a shutter sound forms a single chapter in the digest movie 1 Battery life is shorter in this mode than in AUTO mode because digest movies are recorded for each shot A digest movie may not be recorded if you shoot a still image immediately after turning the camera on choosing e mode or operating the camera in other ways Sounds and vibrations from operating the camera will be recorded in digest movies Q e Digest movie quality is EHpEM3 and cannot be changed e Sounds are not played when you press the shutter button halfway or trigger the self timer 152 e Digest movies are saved as separate movie files in the following cases even if they were recorded on the same day in El mode The digest movie file size reaches approximately 4 GB or the total recording time reaches approximately 13 minutes and 20 seconds The digest movie is protected 114 Daylight saving time H20 or time zone 11152 settings are changed A new folder is created 11155 e Recorded shutter sounds cannot be modified or erased e If you prefer to record digest movies without still images adjust the setting in advance Choose MENU L1130 OY tab gt Digest Type gt No Stills e Individual chapters can
265. ss the 9 button Saving Shooting Settings gt gt Still Images Save commonly used shooting modes and your configured function settings for reuse To access saved settings later simply turn the mode dial to C Even settings that are usually cleared when you switch shooting modes or turn the camera off such as self timer settings can be retained this way Settings that can be saved Shooting mode P Tv Av or IMi o Items set in P Tv Av or IM modes 174 R94 e Shooting menu settings e Zoom positions e Manual focus positions 11181 e My Menu settings 11102 Enter a shooting mode with settings you want to save and change the settings as desired 2 Configure the setting o Press the MENU button choose Save Settings on the Y tab and then press the 9 button o fT Set Control Ring Func STD Set Y button EE Set R button R FUNC Menu Layout Save Settings 3 Save the settings o Press the 4 buttons or turn the db dial to choose OK and then press the 5 button Save Settings Save current settings Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode Index 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 101 e To edit saved settings except their shooting mode
266. ss the button L130 2 Configure the settings Review image after shooting ee Qui o Press the a W buttons or turn the dial to choose Display Time Press the 4 buttons to choose the desired option Brief display after shooting o To restore the original setting repeat this process but choose Quick Displays images only until you can shoot again Displays images for the specified time Even while the shot is displayed you can take another shot by pressing the shutter button halfway again 2 sec 4 sec 8 sec Displays images until you press the shutter button Hold halfway Index No image display after shots Advanced Guide Camera Basics 92 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 52 Changing the Screen Displayed after Shots Change the way images are displayed after shots as follows 4 Set Display Time to 2 sec 4 sec 8 sec or Hold 152 Review image after shooting 2 Configure the settings pepa ho j E i O Press the a wW buttons or turn the suo a db dial to choose Display Info Press cies pret the 4 buttons to choose the desired option m gt n o To restore the original setting repeat this process but choose Off Displays only the image Detailed Displays shooting details
267. stabilization for movies reducing strong camera shake as when shooting while walking Dynamic Image stabilization for slow camera shake such as when shooting movies at telephoto Powered No image stabilization because the camera is mounted on a tripod or held still by other means However during movie recording 4 is displayed and image stabilization to counteract wind or other sources of vibration is used Tripod IS Displayed when you pan following moving subjects with the camera When you follow subjects moving horizontally image stabilization only counteracts vertical camera shake and horizontal stabilization stops Similarly when you follow subjects moving vertically image stabilization only counteracts horizontal camera shake To cancel image stabilization set IS Mode to Off H491 In this case an IS icon is not displayed e In 13 E mode no icon is displayed Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics Index 92 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 39 On Screen Frames gt gt Still Images gt Movies In AUTO mode a variety of frames are displayed once the camera detects subjects you are aiming the camera at e Awhite frame is displayed around the subject or person s face determined by the camera to be
268. t 132 e To switch access points choose Switch Network on the screen displayed when you establish a connection and then follow the procedure in Using Another Access Point 1132 from step 4 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode Wi Fi Functions Index 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 132 Saving Images to a Computer Preparing to Register a Computer Checking Your Computer Environment The camera can connect via Wi Fi to computers running the following operating systems For detailed system requirements and compatibility information including support in new operating systems visit the Canon website e Windows 8 8 1 e Windows 7 SP1 e MacOSX 10 9 e Mac OS X 10 8 2 or later e Windows 7 Starter and Home Basic editions are not supported e Windows 7 N European version and KN South Korean version require a separate download and installation of Windows Media Feature Pack For details check the following website http go microsoft com fwlink Linkld 159730 Installing the Software Windows 7 and Mac OS X 10 8 are used here for the sake of illustration What you will need e Computer e USB cable camera end Mini B A USB cable is not included Although you can install the software without using a cable some features will not be
269. t g gt Basic Guide Shooting Close Ups Macro gt gt Still Images To restrict the focus to subjects at close range set the camera to Y For details on the focusing range see Shooting Range 1196 o Press the 4 button choose Y either press the d4 buttons or turn the 4 dial and then press the 9 button o Once the setting is complete Y is displayed 1 e Ifthe flash fires vignetting may occur G e To prevent camera shake try mounting the camera on a tripod and shooting with the camera set to X3 L142 You can also configure this setting by pressing the 4 button touching NY and then touching it again When focusing is not possible in AF mode use manual focus You can specify the general focal position and then press the shutter button halfway to have the camera determine the optimal focal position near the position you specified For details on the focusing range see Shooting Range 1196 2 MF 4 Choose MF Manual Focus o Press the 4 button choose MF either press the 4 buttons or turn the 4h dial and then press the button o MF and the MF indicator are displayed Eto adjust the focus 2 Specify the general focal position o Referring to the on screen MF indicator bar 1 which shows the distance and focal position and the magnified display area press the 4 buttons or turn c y the dB dial to specify the gene
270. te a single image This mode can reduce the washed out highlights and loss of detail in shadows that tend to occur in high contrast shots Choose HR o Follow steps 1 2 in Image Effects Creative Filters 1158 and choose HORI 2 Shoot o Hold the camera steady as you shoot When you press the shutter button all the way down the camera will take three shots and combine them O Excessive motion blur or certain shooting conditions may prevent you from obtaining the desired results G e f excessive camera shake interferes with shooting mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still Additionally you should set IS Mode to Off when using a tripod or other means to secure the camera H91 e Any subject movement will cause images to look blurry e There will be a delay before you can shoot again as the camera processes and combines the images o INDI may be displayed when you press the shutter button halfway in bright conditions which indicates that the camera will automatically optimize image brightness Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes Index 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 98 Adding Artistic Effects HDR dU oc ai egies so a Natural Images are natural and organic Art Stand
271. tery pack see Number of Shots Recording Time Playback Time H4195 e Charged battery packs gradually lose their charge even when they are not used Charge the battery pack on or immediately before the day of use e The charger can be used in areas with 100 240 V AC power 50 60 Hz For power outlets in a different format use a commercially available adapter for the plug Never use an electrical transformer designed for traveling which may damage the battery pack Inserting the Battery Pack and Memory Card Insert the included battery pack and a memory card sold separately Note that before using a new memory card or a memory card formatted in another device you should format the memory card with this camera 154 Open the cover O Slide the switch 1 and open the cover 2 Before Use Advanced Guide Index Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 19 2 Insert the battery pack Removing the Battery Pack and Memory Card Before Use Holding the battery pack with the terminals 1 facing as shown press the battery lock e Open the cover and press the battery 2 in the direction of the arrow and insert the battery pack until the lock clicks shut lock in the direction of the arrow Advanced Guide o The battery pack will pop
272. th EA the exposure level mark moves when the shutter button is pressed halfway showing the difference from the standard exposure level e With settings other than if an exposure level mark based on your specified shutter speed and aperture value is shown for comparison to the standard exposure level Setup via Touch Operations Set your preferred shutter speed aperture value and ISO speed using touch operations Settings can also be adjusted during recording ne aL 1547 17 Touch 4 Y or IEQAUTO on the i me i screen and then touch 4 to specify a value 1 Some shutter speeds may cause flickering on the screen when recording under fluorescent or LED lighting which may be recorded Q o Setup is not possible during recording by turning the a dial or ED ring e Exposure can be locked before or during recording by touching X e Focus can be locked during recording by touching AF MF is then displayed Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode Index 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 96 Customization for Shooting Styles Functions Assignable to the Control Ring Before Use Functions you can assign to the control ring vary depending on shooting mode and those assignments determine which functions
273. the menu and then choose 4H 129 2 Configure the setting O Press the B button and then adjust the setting by pressing the 4 buttons or turning the dB dial Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode Index 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 76 O AEB shooting is only available in G mode R488 Continuous shooting H87 is not available in this mode e f exposure compensation is already in use H474 the value specified for that function is treated as the standard exposure level for this function e You can also access the setting screen of step 2 by pressing the MENU button when the exposure compensation screen 1174 is displayed e Three shots are taken regardless of any quantity specified in Ue 42 e In Blink Detection mode H51 this function is only available for the final shot e To access the setting screen in step 2 you can either touch RING on the screen in step 1 or touch MIN on the exposure compensation screen 174 e You can also configure this setting by touching or dragging the bar on the setting screen in step 2 to specify a value and then touching BNG Correcting Image Brightness i Contrast gt gt Still Images Before shooting excessively bright or dark image areas such as fa
274. the Menu Screen 1130 Deactivating the AF Assist Beam gt gt Still Images You can deactivate the lamp that normally lights up to help you focus when you press the shutter button halfway in low light conditions o Press the MENU button choose AF assist Beam on the Y tab and then choose Off 30 o To restore the original setting repeat this process but choose On o EA Digital Zoom Standard AF Point Zoom Off Touch Shutter Off AF assist Beam Off Flash Settings Deactivating the Red Eye Reduction Lamp gt gt Still Images You can deactivate the red eye reduction lamp that lights up to reduce red eye when the flash is used in low light shots Access the Flash Settings screen o Press the MENU button choose Flash Settings on the E tab and then press the 3 button 130 2 Configure the setting Flash Settings Red Eye Lamp On Choose Red Eye Lamp and then choose Off 30 o To restore the original setting repeat this process but choose On venue Changing the Image Display Style after Shots gt gt Still Images Before Use Basic Guide You can change how long images are displayed and what information is displayed immediately after shooting Changing the Image Display Period after Shots Access the Review image after shooting screen o Press the MENU button choose Review image after shooting on the 10 tab and then pre
275. the Menu Screen Before Use Settings Configure a variety of camera functions through the menu screen as Basic Guide e Access the FUNC menu 1 by pressing follows Menu items are grouped by purpose on tabs such as shooting the button and then either drag the I playback and so on Note that available menu items vary menu up or down to scroll it or touch a depending on the selected shooting or playback mode H4186 menu item to choose it 1192 e Touch an option 2 to choose it Touch TOR Access the menu screen the option again to confirm your choice and return to the screen displayed before you pressed the button e You can access the screen for options Auto Mode o Press the MENU button 2 Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes labeled with a MANI icon by touching 2 i mE A Choose a tab 4 P Mode e You can access the screen for options o Move the zoom lever to choose a tab labeled with a HN icon by touching Suntio o After you have pressed the A v 5 Tv Av M and C Mode RING Eta e on buttons or turned the dB dial to choose a Date Time 08 08 14 10 00 ee A tab initially you can switch between tabs by pressing the d4 buttons 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 3 Choose a menu item Greenies TER O Press the L amp buttons or turn the db Sound az dial to choose a menu item 10 Appendix Hints Tips On Date Time 08 08 14 10 00
276. the steps in Registering Other Web Services 11140 to update the camera settings 2 Choose the type of images to send only when sending movies with images o Press the MENU button and choose Wi Fi Settings on the ff tab L130 O Press the 4 buttons to choose Image Sync and then press the 4 buttons to choose Stills Movies Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode Wi Fi Functions Index 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 145 3 Assign El to the button only when sending images by pressing the L button Clear the button setting if a smartphone is already assigned to the button 128 o Press the LJ button to access the mobile connection screen choose either press the q gt buttons or turn the 4 dial and then press the 9 button Preparing the Computer Install and configure the software on the destination computer 7 J cea N install the software o Install the software on a computer connected to the Internet 14133 2 Register the camera Windows In the taskbar right click F4 and then click Add new camera 0 Mac OS In the menu bar click E and then click Add new camera o A list of cameras linked to CANON IMAGE GATEWAY is displayed Choose the camera
277. ther access point follow steps 3 4 in Using Another 4 Connect the printer to the network Access Point 11132 o In the printer s Wi Fi setting menu choose the SSID network name displayed on gt the camera to establish a connection 142 Sending Images to Another Camera Connect two cameras via Wi Fi and send images between them as follows Select a Device Add a Device Only Canon brand cameras equipped with a Wi Fi function can be connected to wirelessly Even Canon brand cameras that support Eye Fi cards cannot be connected to if they do not have a Wi Fi function You cannot connect to PowerShot SD430 DIGITAL ELPH WIRELESS DIGITAL IXUS WIRELESS cameras with this camera 4 Access the Wi Fi menu o Access the Wi Fi menu as described in step 2 in Adding a Smartphone Using the Wi Fi Menu R4130 2 Choose gy o Press the a W 4 buttons or turn the 4B dial to choose Y and then press the button Transfer images btwn cameras a D El De wenu Ea 3 Choose Add a Device O Press the a w buttons or turn the 4 dial to choose Add a Device and then press the button Follow steps 1 3 on the target camera too Camera connection information will be added when Start connection on target camera is displayed on both camera screens Select and send 4 Send images o Turn the 4 dial to choose an image to send press the 4 bu
278. to Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes Index 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 12 P Mode More discerning shots in your preferred shooting style ole Instructions in this chapter apply to the camera with the mode dial set to P mode P Program AE AE Auto Exposure Before using a function introduced in this chapter in modes other than P make sure the function is available in that mode 11181 Shooting in Program AE P Mode Before Use gt Still Images gt Movies Basic Guide la You can customize many function settings to suit your preferred shooting style Advanced Guide P il 1547 mgg 3455 1 Enter P mode Camera Basics Set the mode dial to P Auto Mode 2 2 Customize the settings as desired Hybrid Auto Mode 74 1192 and then shoot 3 Other Shooting Modes If adequate exposure cannot be obtained when you press the 4 P Mode shutter button halfway shutter speeds and aperture values are displayed in orange In this case try adjusting the ISO speed 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 1175 or activating the flash if subjects are dark R488 mens which may enable adequate exposure Movies can be recorded in JP mode as well by pressing the 6 Playback Mode movie button However some FUNC 429 and MENU Q30 settings may be automatically adjusted for movi
279. tting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 114 Selecting a Range Choose Select Range Following step 2 in Choosing a Selection Method 1114 choose Select Range and press the 9 button Select Ranga 2 Choose a starting image G o Press the button First image 2 14 10 o Press the gt buttons or turn the ze dial to choose an image and then press the 3 button set gt 150 gt cite 3 Choose an ending image e o Press the gt button to choose Last mas image and then press the button Protect Unlock SET METE menu Jas 6 14 e 100 0006 O Press the 4 buttons or turn the ias o dial to choose an image and then press the button Images before the first image cannot be selected as the last image CES 4 Protect the images Select Range o Press the V button to choose Protect and then press the 9 button 3 images Unlock E gt Q e You can also choose the first or last image by turning the eS dial when the top screen in steps 2 and 3 is displayed e Tocancel protection for groups of images choose Unlock in step 4 e You can also display the screen for choosing the first or last image by touching an image on the top screen in steps 2 or 3 e You can also protect images by touching Protect on the screen in step 4 Protecting All Images at Once 4 Choose Protect All Images Follow
280. tton O Press the A w buttons or turn the dial to change the order and then press the button o Press the MENU button E gt Grayed out items in step 2 can also be specified but they may not be available in some shooting modes To make My Menu immediately accessible by pressing the IMENU button in Shooting mode choose Set default view and press the 4 buttons to choose Yes On the Select items screen for saving or clearing items you can also touch items to select them On the Sort screen you can also drag items to change the display order Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode Index 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 102 Playback Mode Have fun reviewing your shots and browse or edit them in many ways e To prepare the camera for these operations press the BJ button to enter Playback mode It may not be possible to play back or edit images that were renamed or already edited on a computer or images from other cameras Viewing OOOO gt gt Still Images gt Movies gt After shooting images or movies you can view them on the screen as follows gt P F 7 Enter Playback mode Press the D gt button Your last shot is displayed Browse through your image
281. ttons to choose Send this image and then press the button o Press the a w 4 buttons to choose Send and then press the button Image transfer will begin The screen darkens during image transfer o Transfer completed is displayed after the image is sent and the image transfer screen is displayed again e To cancel the connection press the IMENU button choose OK on the confirmation screen either press the 4 buttons or turn the 4B dial and then press the button Connections require that a memory card be in the camera Once you have connected to devices via the Wi Fi menu recent destinations will be listed first when you access the Wi Fi menu You can easily connect again by pressing the A W buttons to choose the device and then pressing the 6 button To add a new device display the device selection screen by pressing the IK P buttons and then configure the setting If you prefer not to display recent target devices choose MENU 30 gt fT tab gt Wi Fi Settings gt Target History gt Off You can also send multiple images at once and change the image size before sending 4144 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode Wi Fi Functions Index 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 143 Image S
282. turn to the shooting screen Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode Index 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 19 Changing Image Color Tones My Colors gt gt Still Images gt Movies Change image color tones as desired such as converting images to sepia or black and white o Press the 9 button choose pp in the menu and choose the desired option H29 o The option you configured is now displayed 4 me Sy An Le fw Ap AL My Corso o Emphasizes contrast and color saturation Ay Vivid hee making images sharper Tones down contrast and color saturation for N Neutral subdued images Se Sepia Creates sepia tone images Gu B W Creates black and white images Combines the effects of Vivid Blue Vivid Green and Vivid Red to produce intense yet natural looking colors resembling images on positive film 4 Lighter Skin Tone Lightens skin tones amp p Darker Skin Tone Darkens skin tones Ag Vivid Blue Emphasizes blues in images Makes the sky ocean and other blue subjects more vivid Sp Positive Film Bs Vivid Green Emphasizes greens in images Makes mountains foliage and other green subjects more vivid ah Rd Emphasizes reds in images Makes red subjects more vivid c Custom Color Adjust contrast
283. u s Polski ceow Suomi e tina 20 e You can also access the Language screen in Playback mode by pressing and holding the O button and immediately pressing the MENU button Adjusting Other Settings The following settings can also be adjusted on the ff tab e Video System 4162 e Wi Fi Settings 11127 e Mobile Device Connect Button 128 Restoring Defaults If you accidentally change a setting you can restore default camera settings q Access the Reset All screen Choose Reset All and then press the 5 button Reset settings to default Cancel K 2 Restore default settings o Press the 4 buttons or turn the di dial to choose OK and then press the 9 button Default settings are now restored Q e The following functions are not restored to default settings Information registered using Face ID 1144 fT tab settings Date Time 22152 Time Zone R4152 Language 51 1157 and Video System 11162 Custom white balance data you have recorded H479 Shooting mode chosen in SC N 155 and Y R458 modes Values set using the exposure compensation dial 474 Movie mode 71 Wi Fi settings 11127 Calibrated value for the electronic level 1155 Copyright information 4156 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 92 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av
284. uals 2 Access the Wi Fi menu O Press the button to turn the camera on O Press the a button eo When the Device Nickname screen is displayed press the button Use the keyboard displayed to enter a nickname L132 On the Device Nickname screen choose OK either press the 1 A w buttons or turn the 4 dial and then press the button Device Nickname Enter a nickname for this camera Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode Wi Fi Functions Index 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 135 Connect to computer MEM gt Select a Device Add a Device venus Select Network Refresh WPS Connection AccessPointl AccessPoint2 venus WPS Connection PBC Method PIN Method WPS Connection Push and hold the access point button then proceed Next nu JE 3 Choose H o Press the a W 4 buttons or turn the 4B dial to choose LJ and then press the button 4 Choose Add a Device O Press the a w buttons or turn the 4 dial to choose Add a Device and then press the button 5 Choose WPS Connection O Press the L4 Y buttons or turn the 4 dial to choose WPS Connection and then press the button 6 Choose PBC Method o Press the a wW
285. ured is now ors displayed ET AUTO Automatically adjusts the ISO AUTO speed to suit the shooting mode and conditions For shooting 125 160 200 Low outdoors in fair weather 250 320 400 500 640 800 For shooting in raid cloudy conditions or at twilight 1000 1250 1600 2000 2500 3200 Slightly For shooting night 4000 5000 6400 High scenes or in dark 8000 10000 12800 G e To view the automatically determined ISO speed when you have set the ISO speed to AUTO press the shutter button halfway e Although choosing a lower ISO speed may reduce image graininess there may be a greater risk of subject and camera shake in some shooting conditions e Choosing a higher ISO speed will increase shutter speed which may reduce subject and camera shake and increase the flash range However shots may look grainy e You can also set the ISO speed by pressing the 6 button choosing B choosing an option either by pressing the P buttons or turning the dial and then pressing the 9 button To specify AUTO press the PNG button on the setting screen Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode Index 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 LO Adjusting ISO Auto Settings gt Still Images When the camera is set to
286. uttons to choose Select Range Select Images amp Qty on the Ex tab Order and then press the 63 button 8 Setting Menu Select All Images and then press the 5 button Clear All Selections y 2 Choose an image Setting Up Printing for All Images gt gt Still Images O Press the 4 buttons or turn the db As a A Select Au odos e Following step 1 in Setting Up Printing 10 Appendix for Individual Images 1170 choose e You can now specify the number of Select All Images and press the 63 Index copies Set 1 copy per image button If you T A the E o Press the 4 buttons or turn the Image It IS labeled with a ICON 10 dial to choose OK and then press the cancel index printing for the image press 63 button the 9 button again V is no longer displayed A gt 4 170 Clearing All Images from the Print List 0 Following step 1 in Setting Up Printing for Individual Images 121170 choose Clear All Selections and press the 9 button o Press the 4 buttons or turn the dial to choose OK and then press the 9 button Clear All Selections Deselect all images Cancel Printing Images Added to the Print List DPOF gt gt Still Images e When images have been added to the print list 11169 L 21170 this screen is displayed after you connect the camera to a PictBridge compatible printer Press the a w buttons to ch
287. v Ty P88 AUTO Ou 2 83 02 A D BE R O dB O B AF NL Save Settings 1101 C M Av Tv P P AUTO Ou RI C37 C2 BB PY ASP IBID HR e D A AP E aY at 1 Options vary depending on the assigned shooting mode 2 Operation when no faces are detected varies by shooting mode 3 Available when the AF frame is set to 1 point 4 On when subject movement is detected Names of people in shots taken using Face ID L144 may not be displayed in some modes or with some settings but they will be recorded in the still images Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 9 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index lt gt I 191 Set Up Tab My Menu Tab Ref Page My Menu settings 1102 Playback Tab Red Eye Correction Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu Q Accessories 10 Appendix Index lt gt 5 192 Ref Page Set Touch Actions 119 Print Tab Item Print Select Images amp Qty Select Range Select All Images Clear All Selections Print Settings Ref Page Handling Precautions The cam
288. v P as AUTO Oo D L E a e aE U UT TD 2 ED o a Custom Display 99 Shooting Info Grid Lines Electronic An C M Av Tv P AUTO ON D L CA AECI TES IES Y 2D 21 A Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 9 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu 9 Accessories 10 Appendix Index lt gt 189 Night Display 92 On Off My om Sl a FUNC Menu Layout 4100 C M Av Tv P 58 AUTO O1 D L 03 02 89 M9 An BD e E MIO D 0 4 2 4 2 P y M me Reverse Disp 11128 On Off C M Av Tv P 58 AUTO O1 D L 02 02 B9 MR AY SDB IE HRS 9 B C Bd mea IS Settings 91 IS Mode Off C M Av Tv P e AUTO O 8 2 02 BB A ASP 1 40 BIE M 9 3 8 0 4 2 d 2 P RNa Continuous C M Av Tv P e AUTO NDEARNA RA EE Ie 2 A A a r Bs BP ral B Shoot Only C M Av Ty P A AUTO ON DR 3 S R DIABLOS IE ADR AS 0 4 2 14 2 P My om Snes Dynamic IS 1 C M Av Tv P as AUTO NDER A A BB cB MR 80 0 53 CO9 a w e 2 C M Av Tv P E AUTO O1 D L C3 02 89 RR A 10 4018 M 9 D 3 0 4 2 4 2 P A Digest Type 11136 Include Stills No Stills C M Av Tv P 8 AUTO O10 D LL e302 DABLE IMA S d a 0 4 2 4 2 P 5 My om E ON a Save x Stills H69 On Off C M Av
289. ve image detail in shadows as follows O Press the button choose Go in the menu and then choose y 129 Once the setting is complete Ex is displayed Using the ND Filter To shoot at slower shutter speeds and smaller aperture values use the ND filter which reduces light intensity to 1 8 the actual level equivalent to 3 stops O Press the button choose NR in the menu and then choose ND L129 Once the setting is complete ND is displayed 1 Mount the camera on a tripod or take other measures to keep it still and prevent camera shake Additionally you should set IS Mode to Off when using a tripod or other means to secure the camera 1191 Q e ND Neutral Density Image Colors Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide gt Still Images gt Movies AA By adjusting white balance WB you can make image colors look more natural for the scene you are shooting Adjusting White Balance Camera Basics o Press the button choose MH in the 9 Auto Mode menu and choose the desired option Hybrid Auto Mode L129 e The option you configured is now 3 Other Shooting Modes w 0 displayed Automatically sets the optimal white balance for 5 Tv Av M and C Mode M Auto i de the shooting conditions 38 Day Light For shooting outdoors in fair weather 6 Playback Mode fix Shade For shooting in the shade 7 Wi Fi Functions Cloudy For shooting in cloudy weat
290. vies turn the 4 dial Use the control ring to find and jump between desired images quickly by E To cancel filtered display press the a filtering image display according to your specified conditions button E fk Jump to Favorites rea PEN images tagged as favorites Camera Basics 1 a SS camera has our e coire emelik images for some E Jump Shot Date Jumps to the first image in each group of 9 Auto Mode conditions those conditions will not be available images that were shot on the same date Hybrid Auto Mode fw Jump 10 Images Jumps by 10 images at a time 3 Other Shooting Modes G e To show or hide information press the V button in step 4 40 Jump 100 Images Jumps by 100 images at a time e Options for viewing the images found in step 4 include 4 P Mode Navigating through Images in an Index 1107 Magnifying Images 112 and Viewing Slideshows 1112 You can also apply image operations to all images found by choosing Basic Guide 4 Choose a condition e Choose a condition or jump method 5 Tv Av M and C Mode Protect All Images in Search in Protecting Images 4114 or in single image display by turning the Select All Images in Search in Erasing Multiple Images at Once i E ring and then pressing the A w 6 Playback Mode 1116 Adding Images to the Print List DPOF 2169 or aliae ing buttons Adding Images to a Photobook 0171 e If you
291. w Q e A VI Aperture value size of the opening made by the iris in the lens e To avoid exposure problems in J Y and AY modes you can have the camera automatically adjust the shutter speed or aperture value even when standard exposure cannot otherwise be obtained Press the MENU button and set Safety Shift on the OY tab to On R430 However safety shift is disabled when the flash fires e You can customize camera operation so that turning the AB dial changes the aperture value H97 Specific Shutter Speeds and Aperture Values M Mode gt gt Still Images Follow these steps before shooting to set your preferred shutter speed and aperture value to obtain the desired exposure For details on available shutter speeds and aperture values see Shutter Speed 0197 and Aperture 14197 4 Enter M mode O Set the mode dial to M 2 Configure the setting o Turn the 4 dial to set the shutter speed 1 and turn the Z ring to set the aperture value 2 O e After you set the shutter speed or aperture value the exposure level may change if you adjust the zoom or recompose the shot e Screen brightness may change depending on your specified shutter speed or aperture value However screen brightness remains the same when the flash is up and the mode is set to Images shot at high ISO speeds may look grainy Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Aut
292. w batteries together Do not insert the batteries with the and terminals reversed This may cause the product to malfunction e Do not sit down with the camera in your pant pocket Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen e When putting the camera in your bag ensure that hard objects do not come into contact with the screen Also close the screen so that it faces the body if your product s screen closes e Do not attach any hard objects to the product Doing so may cause malfunctions or damage the screen Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Index Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 17 Initial Preparations Before Use Prepare for shooting as follows Attaching the Strap Advanced Guide E E E RB asic e ul de Attach the strap 1 Camera Basics Thread the end of the strap through the Auto Mode 7 strap hole 1 and then pull the other 2 Hybrid Auto Mode Basic Ope rations end of the strap through the loop on the o threaded end 2 3 Other Shooting Modes Basic information and instructions from initial 4 P Mode The strap can also be attached to the left side of the camera preparations to shooting and playback 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions j Setting M
293. ward or downward in detailed information display Viewing Short Movies Created When Shooting Still Images Digest Movies gt gt Movies View digest movies recorded automatically in JE mode H436 on a day of still image shooting as follows f Choose an image set Ey Choose a still image labeled with uE and press the 9 button E 2 Play the movie o Press the 4 buttons or turn the dB dial to choose OK The movie recorded automatically on the day of still image shooting is played back from the beginning Play digest movie Cancel e After a moment Na ya will no longer be displayed when you are using the camera with information display deactivated 105 l d e You can also play digest movies by touching NA JE on the screen in step 1 and touching OK on the screen in step 2 Viewing by Date Digest movies can be viewed by date ey St Choose a movie Image Search o Press the MENU button choose List Play Digest Movies on the tab and then choose a date L130 List Piay Diges Smart Shuffle Slideshow Erase 2 Play the movie o Press the button to start playback Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode Index 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 106
294. witch until it clicks into the closed position 2 5 Connect the power cord Insert one end of the power cord into the compact power adapter and then plug the other end into a power outlet e Turn the camera on and use it as desired e When finished turn the camera off and unplug the power cord from the outlet Do not disconnect the adapter or unplug the power cord while the camera is still on This may erase your shots or damage the camera Do not attach the adapter or adapter cord to other objects Doing so could result in malfunction or damage to the product Using the Software The software available for download from the Canon website is introduced below with instructions for installation and saving images to a computer Software After downloading the software from the Canon website and installing it you can do the following things on your computer e CameraWindow Import images and change camera settings e ImageBrowser EX Manage images view search and organize Print and edit images e Digital Photo Professional Browse process and edit RAW images e Internet access is required and any ISP account charges and access fees must be paid separately Software Instruction Manual Refer to the instruction manual when using the software The manual can be accessed from the help system of software some software excluded Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 92 Auto Mode Hyb
295. x lt gt 5 99 Shooting with a Fish Eye Lens Effect Fish Eye Effect gt gt Still Images Shoot with the distorting effect of a fish eye lens Choose j o Follow steps 1 2 in Image Effects Creative Filters 1158 and choose 5D 2 Choose an effect level o Turn the ring to choose an effect level o A preview is shown of how your shot will look with the effect applied 3 Shoot e Try taking some test shots first to make sure you obtain the desired results Shots Resembling Miniature Models Miniature Effect gt gt Still Images gt Movies Creates the effect of a miniature model by blurring image areas above and below your selected area You can also make movies that look like scenes in miniature models by choosing the playback speed before the movie is recorded People and objects in the scene will move quickly during playback Note that sound is not recorded Choose 4 Follow steps 1 2 in Image Effects Creative Filters 1158 and choose 28 o A white frame is displayed indicating the image area that will not be blurred 2 Choose the area to keep in focus O Press the V button eo Move the zoom lever to resize the frame and turn the dial to move it 3 For movies choose the movie playback speed e Turn the Z ring to choose the speed 4 Return to the shooting screen and shoot O Press the button to return to the
296. y Check Edit Info Erase Info Select a person Ll A Hane Jamie Ok Edit Profile a Joshua e g Maria Katie 2 08 08 1986 Checking and Editing Registered Information Access the Check Edit Info screen O Following step 1 in Registering Face ID Information 1144 choose Check Edit Info and press the button menu S 2 Choose a person to check or edit O Press the a W 4 buttons or turn the 4B dial to choose the person to check or edit and then press the button es lt 3 Check or edit the information as needed Face Info List e To check a name or birthday choose Edit Profile either press the a W buttons or turn the 4 dial and then press the 5 button On the screen displayed you can edit names or birthdays as described in step 3 of Registering Face ID Information 0144 e To check face information choose Face Info List either press the L amp buttons or turn the 4 dial and then press the button Press the 6 button on the screen displayed choose face information to erase by pressing the A W 4 buttons or turning the 4 dial and then press the 9 button After Erase is displayed choose OK either press the 4 buttons or turn the dB dial and then press the 69 button Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Index Camera Basics 92 Auto Mode Hybrid
297. y accessing MENU 1130 and choosing PY tab gt Flash Settings gt Flash Output You can also set the flash level in TV or Ay mode by accessing MENU L430 and choosing Le tab gt Flash Settings Flash Mode gt Manual You can also access the Flash Settings MENU screen H430 when the flash is up by pressing the P button and immediately pressing the MENU button You can also access the Flash Settings MENU screen H430 by pressing the gt button and touching MAN Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode Index 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 95 Recording Movies at Specific Shutter Speeds and Aperture Values gt Movies Set your preferred shutter speed aperture value and ISO speed For details on available shutter speeds aperture values and ISO speeds see Shutter Speed 197 Aperture H4197 and Changing the ISO Speed 11175 Enter PX mode O Set the mode dial to PS o Press the 9 button choose PM in the menu and then choose a 129 2 Configure the settings o Turn the dB dial to set the shutter speed o Turn the ring to set the aperture value o Press the button choose W in the menu and choose the desired option L129 Q e Wi
298. y by shooting mode Note that the functions assigned to the control ring 11197 are not displayed in M Ay and Tv modes e ISO ISO speed L175 Tv shutter speed 11193 Av aperture value 194 Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode 7 Wi Fi Functions 8 Setting Menu O Accessories 10 Appendix lt gt 5 98 Customizing Display Information gt gt Still Images gt Movies Set the number of custom displays H429 and what information is displayed in each display when the V button is pressed in shooting screen 4 Access the setting screen o Press the MENU button choose Custom Display on the BY tab and then press the 63 button 430 Custom Display Shooting Info Grid Lines Electronic Level Histogram nl NN e You can also choose an item to display by touching it Assigning Functions to Buttons gt gt Still Images gt Movies You can quickly and easily activate functions that you assign to the Re or movie button Access the setting screen o Press the MENU button choose Set Set button Swap Control Ring Function Before Use Basic Guide Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode se v env gt n i 2 S o a RING button or Set WW button on the 3 Other Shooting Modes E nm M Cs 2 C
299. y the volume panel and then touch a w to adjust the volume At a volume of 0 ag is displayed Pipe Slow Motion To adjust the playback speed press the 4 buttons or turn the 4 dial No sound is played Skip Backward or Previous Clip H4126 To continue skipping Advanced Guide Camera Basics 2 Auto Mode Hybrid Auto Mode 3 Other Shooting Modes 4 P Mode 5 Tv Av M and C Mode 6 Playback Mode Wi Fi signal strength 144 20 White balance correction H457 7 Wi Fi Functions 6 Image Syne 1145 Mercury lamp correction R149 backward keep holding down the button 7 Image editing H120 Movie Cae shot eect E a3 K Previous Frame For fast rewind keep holding down the 9 button 8 Setting Menu compression 11125 21 My Colors 80 01122 l Next Frame For fast forward keep holding down the button Favorites 11118 22 Focusing range 481 L481 o ena ilter 78 Skip Forward or Next Clip 12126 To continue skipping Protection 11114 pe AMIA forward keep holding down the button i 24 Red eye correction 0123 10 Folder number File number oli Erase Clip displayed when a digest movie is selected L1 126 10 Appendix 01155 25 High ISO NR H476 0 Shooting date time H420 26 DR correction 0177 Edit aai 24 Index Shooting mode H181 27 Shadow correction L178 a Shown pisas the camera is connected to a PictBridge compatible i L l Shutter

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

estudo de gerenciamento da rede de distribuição com o protocolo  QTP PCK  Rexel 589151 folder  CUTOUCH - Comfile Technology  Samsung HS-B427BAB User Manual    Fronius Primo 208-240 Installation Help  2. - Farnell  Q CARD User Guide  Trust PS/2 Mouse MI-1500X  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file